2009 Honda Fit Owner's Manual

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2009 Honda Fit was a wise investment. Itwill give you years of driving pleasure.One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to readthis manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner's manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in theinstrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preservesyour investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind thatyour dealer's staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems uniqueto your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you will findinformation that is preceded by a

symbol. This information isintended to help you avoid damage toyour vehicle, other property, or theenvironment.

Introduction

i 2009 Fit

Information Provided by:

California Proposition 65 WarningWARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birthdefects or other reproductive harm.Event Data RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. Thesedevices record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure ofany airbag system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone elseexcept as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.Service Diagnostic RecordersThis vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The datacan be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. Itmay also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is neverlinked to the vehicle owner.

Introduction

ii 2009 Fit


Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:● Safety Labels － on the vehicle.● Safety Messages － preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: DANGER,WARNING, or CAUTION.These signal words mean:

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don't follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don't follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don't followinstructions.

● Safety Headings－ such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

● Safety Section－ such as Driver and Passenger Safety.● Instructions－ how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.This entire book is filled with important safety information － please read itcarefully.

A Few Words About Safety

iii 2009 Fit


2009 Fit Online Reference Owner's Manual Contents Owner's Identification Form Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety .............................................................................................................................. iii Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) .................................................................................................... 3 Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) .................................................... 5 Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, steering wheel, and other convenience items) ............. 57 Features (heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, security, and cruise control) ................................. 109 Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ...................................................................... 197 Driving (engine and transmission operation) ................................................................................................ 213 Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage)........................................... 243 Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, and fuses) .............................. 283 Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, and emissions controls) ....................................... 315 Warranty and Customer Relations (U. S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information) ... 331 Index ........................................................................................................................................................................ I

Service Information Summary ( fluid capacities and tire pressures)

1 00X31-TK6-6003 Information Provided by:

ContentsA convenient reference to thesections in this manual.Your Vehicle at a GlanceA quick reference to the maincontrols in your vehicle.Driver and Passenger SafetyImportant information about theproper use and care of your vehicle'sseat belts, an overview of thesupplemental restraint system, andvaluable information on how toprotect children with child restraints.Instruments and ControlsExplains the purpose of eachinstrument panel indicator andgauge, and how to use the controlson the dashboard and steeringcolumn.FeaturesHow to operate the heating and airconditioning system, the audiosystem, and other conveniencefeatures.

Before DrivingWhat gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to loadluggage and other cargo.DrivingThe proper way to start the engine,shift the transmission, and park.MaintenanceThe maintenance minder shows youwhen you need to take your vehicleto the dealer for maintenanceservice. There is also a list of thingsto check and instructions on how tocheck them.Taking Care of the UnexpectedThis section covers several problemsmotorists sometimes experience, anddetails how to handle them.Technical InformationID numbers, dimensions, capacities,and technical information.

Warranty and Customer Relations(U.S. and Canada only)A summary of the warrantiescovering your new vehicle, and howto contact us for any reason. Refer toyour warranty manual for detailedinformation.IndexService Information SummaryA summary of the information youneed when you pull up to the fuelpump.

Overview of Contents

2 2009 Fit


ꭧ: If equipped

Vehicle with navigation system is shown.

DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG(P. 9, 25)

MIRROR CONTROLS(P. 101)

DOOR LOCK TAB(P. 81)

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCHꭧ

(P. 81)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P. 100)

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE(P. 200)

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATOR (P. 60)GAUGES (P. 68)

AUDIO SYSTEM(P. 115, 143)

PASSENGER'S FRONTAIRBAG(P. 9, 25)

USB ADAPTER CABLEꭧ

(P. 130, 137, 171, 178)

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLSꭧ

(P. 110)

PARKING BRAKE(P. 102)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (P. 219)MANUAL TRANSMISSION (P. 217)

NAVIGATION SYSTEMꭧ

CONTINUED

Your Vehicle at a Glance

3

Your

Vehicleat

aGlance

2009 Fit


ꭧ1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.ꭧ2: If equipped.ꭧ3: Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.


PADDLE SHIFTER(DOWNSHIFT)ꭧ2

(P. 224)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTSꭧ2

(P. 74)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLBUTTONSꭧ2

(P. 189)

NAVIGATIONSYSTEM VOICECONTROLBUTTONSꭧ3

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM OFFSWITCHꭧ2

(P. 234)STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENTS(P. 77)

CRUISE CONTROL BUTTONSꭧ2

(P. 194)

HORNꭧ1 PADDLE SHIFTER(UPSHIFT)ꭧ2

(P. 224)

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS (P. 76)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON(P. 76)

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS(P. 73)

PASSENGERAIRBAG OFFINDICATOR(P. 31)

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER/HEATED MIRRORBUTTONꭧ2

(P. 76/102)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK(P. 190)

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET(P. 106)

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4 2009 Fit


This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

Important Safety Precautions ........... 6Your Vehicle's Safety Features ......... 7

Seat Belts .................................... 8Airbags........................................ 9

Protecting Adults and Teens .......... 111. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 112. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 113. Adjust the Seat-Backs............. 124. Adjust the Head Restraints ..... 135. Fasten and Position the Seat

Belts .................................. 146. Maintain a Proper Sitting

Position ............................. 15Advice for Pregnant Women ...... 16Additional Safety Precautions..... 17

Additional Information About YourSeat Belts............................... 18

Seat Belt System Components.... 18

Lap/Shoulder Belt ..................... 19Automatic Seat Belt

Tensioners ............................ 20Seat Belt Maintenance ............... 20

Additional Information About YourAirbags .................................. 22

Airbag System Components ....... 22How Your Front Airbags Work... 25How Your Side Airbags Work .... 28How Your Side Curtain Airbags

Work..................................... 30How the SRS Indicator Works .... 30How the Side Airbag Off

Indicator Works..................... 31How the Passenger Airbag Off

Indicator Works..................... 31Airbag Service ........................... 32Additional Safety Precautions..... 33

Protecting Children－ GeneralGuidelines ............................. 34

All Children Must BeRestrained ............................. 34

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat ....................................... 35

The Passenger's Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks.......... 35

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren ................................ 37

If a Child Requires CloseAttention ............................... 37

Additional Safety Precautions..... 38Protecting Infants and Small

Children ................................ 39Protecting Infants ...................... 39Protecting Small Children .......... 40

Selecting a Child Seat .................... 41Installing a Child Seat .................... 42

Installing a Child Seat withLATCH.................................. 43

Installing a Child Seat with aLap/Shoulder Belt ................. 45

Installing a Child Seat with aTether ................................... 47

Protecting Larger Children ............ 49Checking Seat Belt Fit ............... 49Using a Booster Seat.................. 50When Can a Larger Child Sit in

Front ..................................... 51Additional Safety Precautions..... 52

Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 53Safety Labels ................................. 54

Driver and Passenger Safety

5

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


You'll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.Always Wear Your Seat BeltA seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped withairbags, make sure you and yourpassengers always wear your seatbelts, and wear them properly (seepage 14).

Restrain All ChildrenChildren age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat, not the front seat. Infants andsmall children should be restrainedin a child seat. Larger childrenshould use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder belt until they can use thebelt properly without a booster seat(see pages 34－ 52).Be Aware of Airbag HazardsWhile airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Don't Drink and DriveAlcohol and driving don't mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don't drinkand drive, and don't let your friendsdrink and drive, either.Control Your SpeedExcessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can also occurat lower speeds. Never drive fasterthan is safe for current conditions,regardless of the maximum speedposted.Keep Your Vehicle in Safe ConditionHaving a tire blowout or a mechanicalfailure can be extremely hazardous. Toreduce the possibility of suchproblems, check your tire pressuresand condition frequently, and performall regularly scheduled maintenance(see page 245).

Important Safety Precautions

6 2009 Fit


Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together to protectyou and your passengers during acrash.Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment, front and rear crushzones, a collapsible steering column,and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.However, you and your passengerscan't take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and always wearyour seat belts. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

(7)

(1)

(4)

(5)

(9)(3)

(11)

(2)

(8)(10)

(6)

(2)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(11) Door Locks

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

7

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


Seat BeltsYour vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument paneland a beeper to remind you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.Why Wear Seat BeltsSeat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle hasairbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

When properly worn, seat belts:● Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle's built-in safety features.

● Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including:－ frontal impacts－ side impacts－ rear impacts－ rollovers

● Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

● Keep you from being thrown out ofthe vehicle.

● Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.What You Should Do:Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.


8 2009 Fit


Airbags

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page 25for more information on how yourfront airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page 28 for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

In addition, your vehicle has sidecurtain airbags to help protect theheads of the driver, front passenger,and passengers in the outer rearseating positions during a moderateto severe side or front impact (seepage 30 for more information on howyour side curtain airbags work).

CONTINUED


9

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:● Airbags do not replace seat belts.They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

● Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

● Airbags can pose serious hazards.To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

What you should do: Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbagsdeploy.


10 2009 Fit


IntroductionThe following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to driveor ride in the front.See pages 34－ 38 for importantguidelines on how to properly protectinfants, small children, and largerchildren who ride in your vehicle.1. Close and Lock the DoorsAfter everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors and thetailgate are closed and locked.

Your vehicle has a door andtailgate open indicator on

the instrument panel to indicatewhen any door or the tailgate is nottightly closed.Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.Locking the doors and the tailgatealso helps prevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door or thetailgate when you come to a stop.See page 81 for how to lock thedoors, and page 62 for how the doorand tailgate open indicator works.Some models have the auto doorlocking/unlocking feature. For moreinformation, see page 83.

2. Adjust the Front Seats

Adjust the driver's seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

11

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page 77).If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.See page 93 for how to adjust thefront seats.

3. Adjust the Seat-Backs

Adjust the driver's seat-back to acomfortable, upright position, leavingample space between your chest andthe airbag cover in the center of thesteering wheel.Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.


12 2009 Fit


Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant's chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.See page 93 for how to adjust theseat-backs.

4. Adjust the Head Restraints

Adjust the driver's head restraint sothe center of the back of your headrests against the center of therestraint.Have passengers adjust their headrestraints properly as well. Tallerpersons should adjust their restraintas high as possible.

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, makesure the center head restraint isproperly positioned.

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Properly adjusted head restraints willhelp protect occupants from whiplashand other crash injuries.See page 94 for how to adjust thehead restraints and how the driver'sand front passenger's active headrestraints work.


13

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


5. Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.The seat belt in the center position ofthe back seat can be unlatched andretracted to allow the back seat to befolded up or down. This seat beltshould be latched whenever the seat-back is in an upright position. Seepage 99 for how to unlatch andrelatch the seat belt.

Position the lap part of the belt as low aspossible across your hips, then pull upon the shoulder part of the belt so thelap part fits snugly. This lets your strongpelvic bones take the force of a crashand reduces the chance of internalinjuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt again toremove any slack, then check that thebelt rests across the center of yourchest and over your shoulder.

This spreads the forces of a crash overthe strongest bones in your upper body.

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.


14 2009 Fit


The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, squeeze the two releasebuttons, and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back. This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt. Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.See page 18 for additionalinformation about your seat belts andhow to take care of them.

6. Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and head restraints, andput on their seat belts, it is veryimportant that they continue to situpright, well back in their seats, withtheir feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches, liesdown, turns sideways, sits forward,leans forward or sideways, or putsone or both feet up, the chance ofinjury during a crash is greatlyincreased.

RELEASE BUTTONS

CONTINUED


15

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Advice for Pregnant Women

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.This will reduce the risk of injuries toboth you and your unborn child thatcan be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it's okay for you todrive.


16 2009 Fit


Additional Safety Precautions● Never let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

● Never let passengers ride in thearea in front of a folded-up rearseat or on top of a folded-down rearseat. If they do, they could be veryseriously injured in a crash.

● Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving. A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

● Two people should never use thesame seat belt. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

● Do not put any accessories on seatbelts. Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

● Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag. Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object in yourmouth, can result in injuries if yourfront airbag inflates.

● Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers. If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

● Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers. Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘ SRSAIRBAG ’’ could interfere with theproper operation of the airbags orbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

● Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door. If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.


17

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


Seat Belt System ComponentsYour seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seating positions.The front seat belts are also equippedwith automatic seat belt tensioners.

This system uses the same sensors asthe front airbags to monitor whetherthe front seat belts are latched orunlatched, and how much weight is onthe front passenger's seat (see page27 ).

The seat belt system includesan indicator on the instrument

panel and a beeper to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

This system monitors the front seatbelts. If you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position before your seatbelt is fastened, the beeper will soundand the indicator will flash. If your seatbelt is not fastened before the beeperstops, the indicator will stop flashingbut remain on.

If a front passenger does not fastentheir seat belt, the indicator willcome on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.If either the driver or a frontpassenger does not fasten their seatbelt while driving, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals.When no one is sitting in the frontpassenger's seat, or a child or smalladult is riding there, the indicatorshould not come on and the beepershould not sound.

If the indicator comes on or thebeeper sounds when the driver's seatbelt is latched and there is no frontseat passenger and no items on thefront seat, something may beinterfering with the monitoringsystem. Look for and remove:● Any items under the frontpassenger's seat.

● Any object(s) hanging on the seator in the seat-back pocket.

● Any object(s) touching the rear ofthe seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

18 2009 Fit


Lap/Shoulder BeltThe lap/shoulder belt goes over yourshoulder, across your chest, andacross your hips.To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page 14 for how toproperly position the belt).To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps some tensionon the belt. During a collision orsudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver's have a lockable retractorthat must be activated to secure achild seat (see page 45).If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockableretractor will activate. The belt willretract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.To deactivate the lockable retractor,unlatch the buckle and let the seatbelt fully retract. To refasten the seatbelt, pull it out only as far as needed.

The lap/shoulder belt in the centerseating position on the rear seat isequipped with a detachable seat beltthat has two parts: a small latch plateand an anchor buckle.The detachable seat belt shouldnormally be latched whenever theseat-backs are in an upright position.For more information about thedetachable seat belt, see page 99.

DETACHABLEANCHOR


19

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver and afront passenger in position.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause the front airbags todeploy.If a side curtain airbag deploysduring a side impact, the tensioneron that side of the vehicle will alsodeploy.The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags do not deploy. In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled.

Seat Belt MaintenanceFor safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page267). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.Honda provides a limited warrantyon seat belts. See your HondaWarranty Information booklet fordetails.


20 2009 Fit


If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by your dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.


21

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


Airbag System Components

(1)

(3)

(6)

(12)

(4) (5)

(11)

(4)

(7)

(5)

(9)(10)

(2)

(8)

(1) Driver's Front Airbag(2) Passenger's Front Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver's Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger's Weight Sensors(8) Front Impact Sensors(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors(11) Front Passenger's Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit(12) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator

Additional Information About Your Airbags

22 2009 Fit


Your airbag system includes:● Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver'sairbag is stored in the center of thesteering wheel; the frontpassenger's airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG’’ (see page 25).

● Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page 28).

● Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page 30).

(14)

(15)

(14)

(15)

(13)

(13) Side Curtain Airbags(14) Side Impact Sensors (First)(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)

CONTINUED


23

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


● Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page 20).

● Sensors that can detect a moderateto severe front impact or sideimpact.

● Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger's sideairbag path and signal the controlunit to turn the airbag off (seepage 29).

● Sensors that can detect whetherthe driver's seat belt and the frontpassenger's seat belt are latched orunlatched (see page 18).

● A driver's seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page27).

● Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger'sseat. If the weight is about 65 lbs(29 kg) or less (the weight of aninfant or small child), thepassenger's front airbag will beturned off (see page 27).

● A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

● An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, or seat belt tensioners(see page 30).

● An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger's side airbag has beenturned off (see page 31).

● An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger'sfront airbag has been turned off(see page 31).

● Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle's electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.


24 2009 Fit


How Your Front Airbags Work

If you ever have a moderate to severefrontal collision, sensors will detectthe vehicle's rapid deceleration.If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver's and frontpassenger's airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.Only the driver's airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger'sairbag off (see page 27).

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won'tinterfere with the driver's visibility,or the ability to steer or operate othercontrols.The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

CONTINUED


25

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag's surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

Dual-Stage AirbagsYour front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.In a more severe crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.In a less severe crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stage willignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

Dual-Threshold AirbagsYour front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whethersensors detect the occupant iswearing a seat belt or not.If the occupant's belt is not latched,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.If the occupant's belt is latched, theairbag will deploy at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.


26 2009 Fit


Advanced AirbagsYour front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.For both advanced airbags to workproperly:● Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

● Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any objects or metal itemsunder the front seats.

● Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The driver's advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag will inflatewith less force, regardless of theseverity of the impact.If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver'sseating position.

The passenger's advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. Although Honda doesnot encourage carrying an infant orsmall child in front, if the sensorsdetect the weight of an infant orsmall child (up to about 65 lbs or 29kg), the system will automaticallyturn the passenger's front airbag off.Be aware that objects placed on thepassenger's seat can also cause theairbag to be turned off.

DRIVER'SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER'SSEAT WEIGHTSENSORS

CONTINUED


27

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


When the airbag is turned off, a‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator inthe center of the dashboard comeson (see page 31).If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.To ensure that the passenger'sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly, do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger's seat.This includes:● A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger's seat.

● Moving the front seat forcibly backagainst cargo on the seat or floorbehind it.

● Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

● Moving the front seat or seat-backforcibly back against the foldedrear seat.

If your vehicle has optional floormats, make sure the mat behind thedriver's seat is hooked to the floormat anchor (see page 267). If it isnot, the mat may interfere with theproper operation of the sensors andoperation of the seat.

How Your Side Airbags Work

If you ever have a moderate to severeside impact, sensors will detect rapidacceleration and signal the controlunit to instantly inflate either thedriver's or the passenger's sideairbag.


28 2009 Fit


Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger's side, the passenger'sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Side Airbag Cutoff SystemYour vehicle has a side airbag cutoffsystem designed primarily to protecta child riding in the front passenger'sseat.Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, if theposition sensors detect a child hasleaned into the side airbag'sdeployment path, the airbag will shutoff.The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag'sdeployment path.Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page 31), have the passengersit upright. Once the passenger isout of the airbag's deployment path,the system will turn the airbag backon, and the indicator will go out.There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.


29

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid accelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag and activate the seat belttensioner on the driver's or thepassenger's side of the vehicle.

If the impact is on the passenger'sside, the passenger's side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.One or both side curtain airbags mayinflate in a moderate to severe frontalcollision which causes the frontairbags to deploy.To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

How the SRS Indicator WorksThe SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.If the indicator comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:● If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

● If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

● If the indicator comes on or flasheson and off while you drive.

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG


30 2009 Fit


If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not workproperly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

How the Side Airbag Off IndicatorWorks

U.S. Canada

This indicatoralerts you that the

passenger's side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It does notmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the indicatorshould come on briefly and then gooff (see page 61). If it doesn't comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger's front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less(the weight of an infant or smallchild) on the front passenger's seat.It does not mean there is a problemwith the airbag.

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

On vehicle with navigation system

U.S.

CONTINUED


31

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


Be aware that objects placed on thefront seat can cause the indicator tocome on.If the weight sensors detect there isno passenger in the front seat, theairbag will be off. However, thepassenger airbag off indicator willnot come on.The passenger airbag off indicatormay come on and off repeatedly if thetotal weight on the seat is near theairbag cutoff threshold.

If an adult or teenage passenger isriding in front, move the seat as far tothe rear as possible, and have thepassenger sit upright and wear theseat belt properly.If the indicator comes on with nofront seat passenger and no objectson the seat, or with an adult ridingthere, something may be interferingwith the weight sensors. Look forand remove:● Any items under the frontpassenger's seat.

● Any object hanging on the seat orin the seat-back pocket.

● Any object(s), such as a folded-down back seat, that are touchingthe rear of the seat-back.

If no obstructions are found, haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer assoon as possible.

Airbag ServiceYour airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:● An airbag ever inflates. Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. Anyseat belt tensioner that activatesmust also be replaced.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an authorized dealer ora knowledgeable body shop.

● The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem. Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

On vehicle without navigation system

U.S. Canada


32 2009 Fit


● If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact. Even if your airbagsdo not inflate, your dealer shouldinspect the driver's seat positionsensor, the front passenger'sweight sensors, the front seat belttensioners, and all seat belts wornduring a crash to make sure theyare operating properly.

Additional Safety Precautions● Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags. Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

● Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason. Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

● Do not expose the frontpassenger's seat-back to liquid. Ifwater or another liquid soaks intoa seat-back, it can prevent the sideairbag cutoff system from workingproperly.

● Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer. Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

● Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer. This could make thedriver's seat position sensor or thefront passenger's weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact HondaAutomobile Customer Service at(800) 999-1009.


33

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to properly protect childpassengers.If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

All Children Must Be RestrainedEach year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children aged 12 andunder.To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to the vehicle(see pages 39－ 48).

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride on abooster seat until the seat belt fitsthem properly (see pages 49 － 52).

Protecting Children － General Guidelines

34 2009 Fit


All Children Should Sit in a BackSeatAccording to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride.Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

The Passenger's Front Airbag CanPose Serious RisksFront airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger's front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.Even though your vehicle has anadvanced front airbag system thatautomatically turns the passenger'sfront airbag off (see page 31), pleasefollow these guidelines:InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's front airbag. If theairbag inflates, it can hit the back ofthe child seat with enough force tokill or very seriously injure an infant.

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's front airbag can behazardous. If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child's head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger'sfront airbag. Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page 49 for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

CONTINUED


35

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


To remind you of the passenger'sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

U.S. Models DASHBOARD

SUN VISORS

Canadian ModelsSUN VISORS


36 2009 Fit


If You Must Drive with SeveralChildrenYour vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:● Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page 49).

● Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page 93).

● Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page 15).

● Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page14).

If a Child Requires CloseAttentionMany parents say they prefer to putan infant or a small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in a backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.


37

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


Additional Safety Precautions● Never hold an infant or child onyour lap. If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing a seatbelt, the child can be torn fromyour arms and be seriously hurt orkilled.

● Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child. During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

● Never let two children use thesame seat belt. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

● Make sure any unused seat beltthat a child can reach is buckled,the lockable retractor is activated,and the belt is fully retracted andlocked. If a child wraps a looseseat belt around their neck, theycan be seriously or fatally injured.(See pages 45 and 46 for how toactivate and deactivate thelockable retractor.)

● Use the childproof door locks toprevent children from opening therear doors. This can preventchildren from accidentally fallingout (see page 82).

● Do not leave children alone in avehicle. Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces, andcan be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

● Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

● Keep vehicle keys/remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren. Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the tailgate,which can lead to accidental injuryor death.


38 2009 Fit


Protecting Infants

Child Seat TypeAn infant must be properly restrainedin a rear-facing, reclining child seatuntil the child reaches the seatmaker's weight or height limit for theseat, and the child is at least one yearold.Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby's head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position. If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

Rear-facing Child Seat PlacementA rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front. Never put arear-facing child seat in the front seat.

If the passenger's front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger'sadvanced front airbag system.

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants and Small Children

39

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat directly behind thefront passenger's seat, move the seatas far forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat TypeA child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker's weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat until the childreaches the weight or height limit forthe seat.Child Seat PlacementWe strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger's airbag can behazardous. If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child's head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

40 2009 Fit


Even with advanced front airbagsthat automatically turn thepassenger's front airbag off (see page31), a back seat is the safest place fora small child.If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

Selecting a Child SeatWhen buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:1. The child seat should meet U.S. or

Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213. Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

2. The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

3. The child seat should fit the vehicleseating position (or positions)where it will be used.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

41

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:1. Properly secure the child seat to

the vehicle. All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

2. Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured. After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seatbelt should be installed as firmlyas possible. However, it does notneed to be ‘‘ rock solid. ’’ Someside-to-side movement can beexpected and should not reducethe child seat's effectiveness.If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmlysecured.

3. Secure the child in the child seat.Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker'sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

Installing a Child Seat

42 2009 Fit


Installing a Child Seat withLATCHYour vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer rear seats.The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.You can find lower anchors in theslits in the seat-backs.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:1. Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

2. Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

3. Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker's instructions.Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

LOWER ANCHORS

BUTTON

Rigid type

CONTINUED


43

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

4. Whatever type you have, follow thechild seat maker's instructions foradjusting or tightening the fit.

5. Lift the head restraint (see page94), then route the tether strapthrough the legs of the headrestraint and over the seat-back,making sure the strap is nottwisted.

6. Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, then tighten the strap asinstructed by the child seat maker.

7. Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

Flexible type

ANCHOR

TETHER STRAP HOOK


44 2009 Fit


Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder BeltWhen not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver's have a lockable retractor thatmust be activated to secure a childseat.If you intend to install a child seat inthe center seating position of the rearseat, make sure to push down thehead restraint to the lowest position,and make sure the detachable seatbelt is securely latched (see page99).

1. With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat according tothe seat maker's instructions, theninsert the latch plate into thebuckle.

2. To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

3. After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

CONTINUED


45

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


4. After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help to putweight on the child seat, or pushon the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

5. Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockable retractorand remove a child seat, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.


46 2009 Fit


Installing a Child Seat with aTetherA child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat.Each rear outside seating positionhas an anchorage point on the seat-back, and the center seating positionhas an anchorage point in the ceilingnear the tailgate.Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

Using an Outer Anchor

1. After properly securing the childseat (see page 45), lift the headrestraint, then route the tetherstrap over the seat-back andthrough the head restraint legs.

2. Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the tetherstrap is not twisted.

3. Tighten the strap according to theseat maker's instructions.

ANCHOR

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

CONTINUED


47

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


Using the Center Anchor

1. Lower the head restraint to itslowest position.

2. After properly securing the childseat (see page 45), open theanchor cover.

3. Route the tether strap over thehead restraint, then attach thetether strap hook to the anchor,making sure the tether strap is nottwisted.

4. Tighten the strap according to theseat maker's instructions.

ANCHOR

COVER

ANCHOR

TETHER STRAP HOOK


48 2009 Fit


When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.The following pages give instructionson how to check proper seat belt fit,what kind of booster seat to use ifone is needed, and importantprecautions for a child who must sitin front.

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger's frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:1. Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

2. Do the child's knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

CONTINUED

Protecting Larger Children

49

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


3. Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child's neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child'sthighs?

5. Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

Using a Booster Seat

A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seat untilthe lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and Canadian provincesalso require children to use a boosterseat until they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intendto drive.Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster seat meetsfederal safety standards (see page35) and that you follow the boosterseat maker's instructions.


50 2009 Fit


If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seat beltproperly.A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle's orbooster's seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFrontThe National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.If the passenger's front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child's body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.Physical SizePhysically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages 14 and 49). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.MaturityTo safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

CONTINUED


51

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:● Carefully read the owner's manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

● Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

● Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

● Check that the child's seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

● Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Additional Safety Precautions● Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck. This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

● Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm. This could causevery serious injuries during acrash. It also increases the chancethat the child will slide under thebelt in a crash and be injured.

● Two children should never use thesame seat belt. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

● Do not put any accessories on aseat belt. Devices intended toimprove a child's comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.


52 2009 Fit


Your vehicle's exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. Carbonmonoxide should not enter thevehicle in normal driving if youmaintain your vehicle properly andfollow the information on this page.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:● The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

● You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

● The vehicle was in an accident thatmay have damaged the underside.

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the tailgate open, airflow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle'sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:1. Select the fresh air mode.2. Select the mode.3. Turn the fan on high speed.4. Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

53

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that could cause serious injury or death.Read these labels carefully.If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner),contact your dealer for a replacement.

U.S. models onlyDASHBOARD

U.S. models

SUN VISORS

Canadian models

Safety Labels

54 2009 Fit


HOODU.S. models

Canadian models

RADIATOR CAP

U.S. models Canadian modelsDOORJAMBS

CONTINUED

Safety Labels

55

Driver

andPassenger

Safety

2009 Fit


56 2009 Fit


This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

Control Locations.......................... 58Instrument Panel .......................... 59Instrument Panel Indicators.......... 60Gauges.......................................... 68Trip Meter ................................ 69Current Fuel Mileage................ 70Average Fuel Mileage ............... 70Odometer.................................. 70Fuel Gauge ............................... 70Check Fuel Cap Indicator ......... 70Maintenance Minder ................ 71

Controls Near the SteeringWheel ....................................... 72

Windshield Wipers andWashers ................................ 73

Windshield Wipers ................... 73Rear Window Wiper and

Washer ................................. 73Turn Signal and Headlights .......... 74Headlights .................................... 75Instrument Panel Brightness ........ 76Hazard Warning Button ................ 76Rear Window Defogger................. 76Steering Wheel Adjustment .......... 77Keys and Locks............................. 78

Immobilizer System ...................... 79Ignition Switch.............................. 80Door Locks ................................... 81Power Door Locks .................... 81Childproof Door Locks.............. 82Auto Door Locking/

Unlocking ............................. 83Auto Door Locking ................... 83Auto Door Unlocking ................ 85

Tailgate ......................................... 88Remote Transmitter ...................... 90Seats ............................................. 93Power Windows .......................... 100Mirrors ....................................... 101Parking Brake............................. 102Interior Convenience Items......... 104Lower Glove Box .................... 105Upper Glove Box..................... 105Beverage Holders ................... 106Seat Under Box....................... 106Accessory Power Socket ......... 106Sun Visor ................................ 106

Interior Lights............................. 107

Instruments and Controls

57

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


ꭧ: If equipped

MIRROR CONTROLS(P. 101)

POWER DOORLOCK MASTER SWITCHꭧ

(P. 81)

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE(P. 200)

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES(P. 100)

PARKING BRAKE (P. 102)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION(P. 219)MANUAL TRANSMISSION(P. 217)

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLSꭧ

(P. 110)

AUDIO SYSTEM (P. 115, 143)INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P. 60)GAUGES (P. 68)

DOOR LOCK TAB(P. 81)


USB ADAPTER CABLEꭧ

(P. 130, 137, 171, 178)

NAVIGATION SYSTEMꭧ

Control Locations

58 2009 Fit


ꭧ: If equipped

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATORꭧ (P. 66, 193)

WASHER LEVELINDICATORꭧ (P. 65)

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP (P. 304)

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR (P. 60, 303)

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR (P. 60, 303)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR (P. 66)

FOG LIGHT INDICATORꭧ (P. 64)

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P. 64)

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR (P. 30, 61)

MAINTENANCE MINDERINDICATOR (P. 66)

CRUISE MAIN INDICATORꭧ (P. 65)

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATORꭧ (P. 65)

LOW TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P. 63)

ELECTRIC POWERSTEERING (EPS)INDICATOR (P. 62)

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P. 65)

LOW FUEL INDICATOR(P. 62)

TPMS INDICATORꭧ (P. 64)

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR (P. 60)

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR(P. 60, 305)

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS INDICATOR (P. 65)

HIGH TEMPERATUREINDICATOR (P. 63)

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATORꭧ (P. 67)

VSA OFF INDICATORꭧ

(P. 67)

SIDE AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR (P. 31, 61)

LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATORꭧ (P. 64)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR (P. 62)

DOOR AND TAILGATE OPENINDICATOR (P. 62)

Instrument Panel

59

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


The instrument panel has manyindicators that give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

See page 304.

Low Oil PressureIndicator

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page 303.

Charging SystemIndicator

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For moreinformation, see page 303.

U.S. Canada

Parking Brakeand BrakeSystem Indicator(Red)

This indicator has two functions:1. It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. A beepersounds if you drive with theparking brake not fully released.Driving with the parking brake notfully released can damage thebrakes and tires.

2. If it remains on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For more information, seepage 305.

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassengers to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour seat belts, the beeper sounds,and the indicator flashes. If you donot fasten your seat belts before thebeeper stops, the indicator stopsflashing but remains on.

Instrument Panel Indicators

60 2009 Fit


If your front passenger does notfasten their seat belt, the indicatorcomes on about 6 seconds after theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position.If either of you do not fasten yourseat belt while driving, the beeperwill sound and the indicator will flashagain at regular intervals. For moreinformation, see page 18.

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates a potentialproblem with your front airbags. Thisindicator will also alert you to apotential problem with your sideairbags, passenger's side airbagcutoff system, side curtain airbags,automatic seat belt tensioners,driver's seat position sensor, or thefront passenger's weight sensors.For more information, see page 30.

U.S. Canada

Side Airbag OffIndicator

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger's side airbag hasautomatically shut off. For moreinformation, see page 31.

CONTINUED


61

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to the START (III)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem with theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked at a dealer. With thisindicator on, your vehicle still hasnormal braking ability but no anti-lock function. For more information,see page 231.

Electric Power Steering(EPS) Indicator

This indicator normally comes on whenyou turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position and goes off after theengine starts. If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem in theelectric power steering system. If thishappens, stop the vehicle in a safeplace and turn off the engine. Reset thesystem by restarting the engine. Theindicator will not turn off immediately.If it does not go off after driving a shortdistance, or comes back on again whiledriving, take the vehicle to your dealerto have it checked. With the indicatoron, the EPS may be turned off, makingthe vehicle harder to steer.

If you turn the steering wheel to thefull left or right position repeatedlywhile stopping or driving at very lowspeed, you may feel slightly hardersteering in order to prevent damage tothe steering box caused byoverheating.

Low Fuel Indicator

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.When the indicator comes on, thereis about 1.64 US gal (6.2 L) of fuelremaining in the tank before theneedle reaches E. There is a smallreserve of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the needle does reach E.

Door and Tailgate OpenIndicator

This indicator comes on if any dooror the tailgate is not closed tightly.


62 2009 Fit


High TemperatureIndicator

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the engine coolant. Itnormally comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II) positionand goes off after a few seconds. Innormal driving conditions, thisindicator should not blink or stay on. Insevere driving conditions, such as veryhot weather or a long period of uphilldriving, this indicator may blink. Thismeans the engine coolant temperatureis high. If the indicator begins to blinkwhile you are driving, be sure to slowdown to prevent overheating. If theindicator stays on, pull safely to theside of the road and turn off the engine.See page 301 for instructions andprecautions on checking the engine'scooling system.

Do not drive the vehicle while theindicator is on or the engine may bedamaged.

Low TemperatureIndicator

This indicator monitors thetemperature of the engine coolant. Ifthere is no problem, this indicatorcomes on when the engine is cold. Ifit comes on when the engine is warm(normal operating temperature),have the vehicle inspected by yourdealer as soon as possible.

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If an indicator does not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs is burnedout (see page 264). Replace the bulbas soon as possible, since otherdrivers cannot see that you aresignaling.When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signal indicatorsand all turn signals on the outside ofthe vehicle flash.

CONTINUED


63

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


Low Tire PressureIndicator

U.S. models onlyThis indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on while driving,it indicates that one or more of yourvehicle's tires are significantly low onpressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost the pressure, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,replace the flat tire with the compactspare (see page 284), and have theflat tire repaired as soon as possible.If two or more tires are underinflated,call a professional towing service(see page 311). For moreinformation, see page 235.

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

U.S. models onlyThis indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.If this indicator comes on and stayson at any other time, or if it does notcome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, thereis a problem with the TPMS. Withthis indicator on, the low tirepressure indicator will not come onwhen a tire loses pressure. Take thevehicle to your dealer to have thesystem checked.

Lights On Indicator

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will stay on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver's door.

Fog Light Indicator

On Sport modelThis indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. For moreinformation, see page 75.


64 2009 Fit


High Beam Indicator

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page 75.This indicator comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page 75).

Daytime Running LightsIndicator

If this indicator comes on when theignition switch is turned to the ON(II) position and the parking brake isreleased, it means there is a problemin the circuit. Have your vehiclechecked by your dealer.

Cruise Main Indicator

On Sport model and Canadian LX modelThis indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button (seepage 194).

Cruise Control Indicator

On Sport model and Canadian LX modelThis indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page 194for information on operating thecruise control.

Washer Level Indicator

Canadian models onlyThis indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page 258).

CONTINUED


65

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


Maintenance MinderIndicator

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Itreminds you that it is time to takeyour vehicle in for scheduledmaintenance. The maintenance mainitems and sub items will be displayedin the information display. See page245 for more information on themaintenance minder.This indicator goes off when yourdealer resets it after completing therequired maintenance service.

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. It will go off if youhave inserted a properly codedignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink,and the engine's fuel system will bedisabled (see page 79).

Security System Indicator

On Sport modelThis indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page 193for more information on the securitysystem.

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR


66 2009 Fit


Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)System Indicator

If equippedThis indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and when the ignition switchis turned to the START (III) position.It flashes when VSA is active (seepage 233).If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or if it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Takeyour vehicle to a dealer to have itchecked. Without VSA, your vehiclestill has normal driving ability, butwill not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. See page 233for more information on the VSAsystem.

VSA Off Indicator

If equippedIt comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehicle stabilityassist (VSA) system.This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and when the ignition switchis turned to the START (III) position.See page 233 for more informationon the VSA system.


67

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE

SELECT/RESET KNOB

INFORMATION DISPLAY

ODOMETER/TRIP METER/CURRENT FUEL MILEAGE/AVERAGE FUEL MILEAGE/CHECK FUEL CAP INDICATORU.S. model is shown.

Gauges

68 2009 Fit


The information display consists oftwo segments. The upper segmentdisplays current fuel mileage,maintenance item code(s), and thelower segment displays the tripmeter, odometer, average fuelmileage, and engine oil life.

To switch the display, press andrelease the select/reset knobrepeatedly. When you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position the last selection isdisplayed.

Trip MeterThis meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the select/resetknob until the number resets to‘‘ 0.0 ’’.When you reset the trip meter,average fuel mileage is resetsimultaneously.

ODOMETER TRIP METER

CURRENT FUELMILEAGE

AVERAGE FUELMILEAGE

ENGINE OIL LIFE

Gauges

69

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


Current Fuel MileageThis shows your current fuel mileagein mpg (U.S.) or l/100 km (Canada).Average Fuel MileageThis shows your vehicle's averagefuel economy in mpg (U.S.) or l/100km (Canada) since you last reset thetrip meter.When you reset a trip meter, theaverage fuel mileage for that tripmeter also resets.

OdometerThe odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.Fuel GaugeThis shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

Avoid driving with an extremely lowfuel level. Running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

Check Fuel Cap IndicatorIf the fuel fill cap is loose or missing,a ‘‘ CHECK FUEL CAP ’’ messageappears on the information displayafter you start the engine. Themessage changes from CHECK, toFUEL, to CAP repeatedly.Turn the engine off and confirm thefuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosenthe cap, then retighten it until itclicks at least once. You can cycle themessage off of the display bypressing the select/reset knobrepeatedly, but this message will bedisplayed each time the engine isstarted. It will take several days ofnormal driving for the vehicle to turnthe warning off.

Gauges

70 2009 Fit


If the system still detects a loose ormissing fuel fill cap, the malfunctionindicator lamp (MIL) comes on. Turnthe engine off, and check orretighten the fuel fill cap until itclicks at least once. The MIL goesout after several days of normaldriving once the cap is tightened orreplaced. If it does not go out, haveyour dealer inspect the vehicle. Formore information, see page 304.

Maintenance MinderThe information display in theinstrument panel shows you theengine oil life and maintenanceservice items when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Thisinformation helps to keep you awareof the periodic maintenance yourvehicle needs for continued trouble-free driving. Refer to page 245 formore information.

Gauges

71

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


ꭧ1: To use the horn, press the center pad of the steering wheel.ꭧ2: If equipped.ꭧ3: Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.

PADDLE SHIFTER (DOWNSHIFT)ꭧ2

(P. 224)

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTSꭧ2

(P. 74)

NAVIGATION SYSTEMVOICE CONTROLBUTTONSꭧ3

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS(P. 77)

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONSꭧ2

(P. 194)

AUXILIARY INPUT JACK(P. 190)

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET(P. 106)

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR(P. 31)

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER/HEATEDMIRROR BUTTONꭧ2

(P. 76/102)

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS(P. 73)

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON(P. 76)

PADDLE SHIFTER(UPSHIFT)ꭧ2

(P. 224)

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS(P. 76)

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROL BUTTONSꭧ2

(P. 189)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST (VSA) SYSTEMOFF SWITCHꭧ2

(P. 234)


HORNꭧ1

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

72 2009 Fit


Windshield Wipers

1. MIST2. OFF3. INT－ Intermittent4. LO － Low speed5. HI － High speed6. Windshield washersPush the right lever up or down toselect a position.

MIST － The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.OFF － The wipers are not activated.

INT－The wipers operate everyfew seconds.

LO － The wipers run at low speed.HI－ The wipers run at high speed.WindshieldWashers －

Pull the wiper controllever toward you, andhold it. The washersspray until you releasethe lever. The wipersrun at low speed, thencomplete one moresweep after you releasethe lever.

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

1. OFFWhen you turn the wiper switch tothe ‘‘ OFF ’’ position, the wiper willreturn to its parked position.

2. Rotate the switch clockwise to turnthe rear window wiper ON.

3. Hold past ON to turn the rearwindow wiper on and to spray therear window washer.

CONTINUED

Windshield Wipers and Washers

73

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


4. Hold past OFF to turn the rearwindow wiper on and to spary therear window washer. The rearwindow wiper makes one moresweep after you release the switch.

When you shift the transmission tothe reverse position with the frontwindshield wiper activated, the rearwiper operates automatically even ifthe rear wiper switch is off.The rear window washer uses thesame fluid reservoir as thewindshield washer.

Turn Signal and Headlights

1. Turn signal2. Off3. Parking and interior lights4. Headlights5. High beams6. Flash high beamsOn Sport model7. Fog lights off8. Fog lights on

Turn Signal － Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever andhold it. The lever will return to thecenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Windshield Wipers and Washers, Turn Signal and Headlights

74 2009 Fit


Headlights－ Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theparking lights, taillights, instrumentpanel lights, side-marker lights, andrear license plate lights.Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, the lightson indicator comes on as a reminder.This indicator stays on if you leavethe light switch on and turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position.If you leave the lights on with the keyremoved from the ignition switch,you will hear a reminder chime whenyou open the driver’s door.

High Beams－ Push the leverforward and the high beam indicatorwill come on (see page 65). Pull itback to return to low beams.To flash the high beams, pull thelever back lightly, then release it.The high beams will stay on as longas you hold the lever back.Fog LightsOn Sport modelTurn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.Theywill go off when the headlights areturned off.

Daytime Running LightsWith the headlight switch off or inthe position, the high beamheadlights and the high beamindicator come on with reducedbrightness when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if you setthe parking brake.The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

Headlights

75

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


Instrument Panel Brightness

You can change the instrument panelbrightness only when the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position andthe light switch is on.

Turn the knob on the lower part of theinstrument panel to adjust thebrightness.

You will hear a beep when maximumor minimum brightness is reached.You will also hear a beep when themaximum level is canceled by turningthe knob a click to the left.

Hazard Warning Button

Push the button to turn on thehazard warning lights (four-wayflashers). This causes all four outsideturn signals and both turn indicatorsin the instrument panel to flash. Usethe hazard warning lights if you needto park in a dangerous area nearheavy traffic, or if your vehicle isdisabled.

Rear Window Defogger

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicator in thebutton comes on to show thedefogger is on. You must manuallyshut off the rear window defoggerwhen it is no longer needed.

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL KNOB

Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger

76 2009 Fit


Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side-to-side.If equippedPushing this button also turns themirror heaters on or off. For moreinformation, see page 102.

Steering Wheel AdjustmentMake any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

1. Pull the lever under the steeringcolumn toward you until it stops.

2. Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out, so it pointstoward your chest, not toward yourface. Make sure you can see theinstrument panel gauges andindicators.

3. Push the lever forward fully to lockthe steering wheel in position.

4. Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

Rear Window Defogger, Steering Wheel Adjustment

77

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


On Sport model and Canadian LX model

Your vehicle comes with the twoignition keys.

All models except Sport model andCanadian LX model

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if the circuitsare damaged.● Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

● Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

● Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

All models except Sport model andCanadian LX modelThe keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

KEY NUMBER TAG KEYS WITHTRANSMITTER

KEY NUMBER TAG KEYS

Keys and Locks

78 2009 Fit


The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine's fuelsystem is disabled.When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come onbriefly, then go off. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, remove the key,reinsert it, and turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position again.The system may not recognize yourkey's coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your dealer.Do not attempt to alter this system oradd other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle inoperable.If you have lost your key and cannotstart the engine, contact your dealer.

Always take the ignition key with youwhenever you leave the vehicle alone.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

79

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


The ignition switch has four positions:LOCK (0), ACCESSORY (I), ON (II),and START (III).

LOCK (0) － You can insert or removethe key only in this position. To turnthe key, push it in slightly. If yourvehicle has an automatic transmission,the shift lever must also be in Park.

If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft lock may make it difficult to turnthe key. Firmly turn the steering wheelto the left or right as you turn the key.

ACCESSORY (I)－ You can operatethe audio system and the accessorypower socket in this position.ON (II)－ This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from theACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)position.START (III) － Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the key.You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the LOCK (0) orthe ACCESSORY (I) position andopen the driver's door. Remove thekey to turn off the beeper.If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control of thevehicle.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

Ignition Switch

80 2009 Fit


Each door has a lock tab next to theinside door handle. Pull the lock tabto lock the door, and push it forwardto unlock the door.On Canadian DX and DX-A modelsTo lock the passenger's door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull thelock tab and close the door. To lockthe driver's door, pull and hold theoutside door handle, then pull thelock tab. Release the handle, thenclose the door.

When the door is unlocked, you cansee the red indicator on the lock tababove the inner door handle.

All models except Sport model andCanadian LX modelEach front door can be locked orunlocked with the ignition key.

Power Door Locks

All models except Canadian DX andDX-A modelsTo lock the doors and the tailgate,push the top of the master door lockswitch on the driver's door, pull thelock tab rearward on the driver'sdoor, or use the key in the outsidedoor lock on the driver's door.Pushing the bottom of the masterdoor lock switch unlocks all doorsand the tailgate.

LOCK TAB

To lock

To unlock

RED INDICATORLOCK

UNLOCK

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

CONTINUED

Door Locks

81

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


The lock tab on each passenger'sdoor locks and unlocks only thatdoor. Pushing forward the lock tabon the driver's door unlocks only thatdoor. To unlock only the driver'sdoor from the outside, turn the keyand release it. If you turn it again, theremaining doors and the tailgateunlock.To lock a passenger's door whengetting out of the vehicle, pull thelock tab rearward and close the door.To lock the driver's door, removekey from ignition switch and pull thelock tab rearward or push the top ofthe master door lock switch, thenclose the door.

Lockout PreventionIf you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, lockout preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver'sdoor. With any door open and thekey in the ignition switch, lockingwith master door lock switch isdisabled. If the driver's door isclosed, the lock tab on the driver'sdoor is not disabled. Pulling thedriver's lock tab rearward will lock alldoors. If you try to lock an opendriver's door by pulling the lock tabrearward, the driver's door lock tabpops out and unlocks the driver'sdoor.

Childproof Door Locks

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position (lever isdown), the door cannot be openedfrom the inside regardless of theposition of the lock tab. To open thedoor, pull the lock tab forward anduse the outside door handle.

LEVER

Unlock

Lock

Door Locks

82 2009 Fit


CONTINUED

Door Locks

83

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit

Auto Door Locking/UnlockingOn all models except Canadian DX andDX-AYour vehicle has customizablesettings for the doors and tailgate toautomatically lock and unlock. Thereare default settings for each of thesefeatures. You can turn off or changethe settings for these features asdescribed on the following pages.When you customize the setting,make sure your vehicle is parkedsafely, the engine is off, and apply theparking brake. Make all settingsbefore you start driving.

Auto Door LockingThe auto door locking feature hasthree possible settings:● The auto door locking isdeactivated all the time.

● All doors and tailgate lockwhenever you move the shift leverout of the Park (P) position (A/Tvehicles).

● All doors and tailgate lock whenthe vehicle speed reaches 9 mph(15 km/h).This is the default setting.

To turn off the Auto Door Lockmodes:

1. Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver'sdoor.


Door Locks

84 2009 Fit

3. Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver's door until you hear a click(after about 5 seconds).

4. Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position.

To program the Park Lock mode:Locks all doors and tailgate when theshift lever is moved out of the Park (P)position (A/T vehicles only).

1. Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and make sure toclose the driver's door.

3. Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver's door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).



CONTINUED

Door Locks

85

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit

To program the Drive Lock mode:Locks all doors and tailgate when thevehicle's speed reaches about 9 mph (15km/h).



3. On A/T vehicles, push and hold thebrake pedal, and move the shiftlever out of the Park (P) position.

4. Push and hold the front of themaster door lock switch on thedriver's door. You will hear a click.Keep holding the switch until youhear another click (after about 5seconds).

5. Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switch tothe ACCESSORY (I) position. OnA/T vehicles, move the shift lever tothe Park (P) position.

6. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position.

Auto Door UnlockingThe auto door unlocking feature hasfive possible settings:● The auto door unlocking isdeactivated all the time.

● On A/T vehicles, the driver's doorunlocks when you move the shiftlever to the Park (P) position.This is the default setting.

● All doors and tailgate unlock whenyou move the shift lever to thePark (P) position (A/T vehicles).

● The driver's door unlockswhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.This is the default setting on M/Tvehicles.

● All doors and tailgate unlockwhenever you turn the ignitionswitch to the ACCESSORY (I)position.

A/T models


Door Locks

86 2009 Fit

To turn off the Auto Door Unlockmodes:


2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, and open the driver'sdoor.

3. Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver's door. You will hear a click,and after about 5 seconds, you willhear another click.


To program the Park Unlock mode:Unlocks the driver's door or all doorsand tailgate when the shift lever ismoved into the Park (P) position (A/Tvehicles only).

1. Make sure the shift lever is in thePark (P) position.


3. Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver's door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:● Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate driver's door unlockfeature.

● Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate all doors and tailgateunlock feature.



Door Locks

87

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit

To program the Ignition SwitchUnlock mode:Unlocks the driver's door or all doorsand tailgate when the ignition switch ismoved out of the ON (II) position.



3. On A/T vehicles, push and hold thebrake pedal, then move the shiftlever out of the Park (P) position.

4. Push and hold the rear of themaster door lock switch on thedriver's door. You will hear a click.Continue to hold the switch:● Until you hear another click(after about 5 seconds) toactivate driver's door unlockfeature.

● Or, until you hear two moreclicks (after about 10 seconds)to activate all doors and tailgateunlock feature.

5. Release the switch, and within 5seconds, turn the ignition switch tothe ACCESSORY (I) position. OnA/T vehicles, move the shift lever tothe Park (P) position.


Even if your vehicle's battery isremoved or goes dead, the systemkeeps the auto door lock/unlocksetting which you selected.

A/T models


All models except Canadian DX andDX-A modelsThe tailgate will lock or unlock whenyou lock or unlock the driver's doorby using the key, the lock tab on thedriver's door, the master door lockswitch or the remote transmitter (ifequipped).

All models except Sport model andCanadian LX modelYou can lock or unlock the tailgatewith the key.

To open the tailgate, pull the handle,then lift up.

LOCK

UNLOCK

KEY

HANDLE

Tailgate

88 2009 Fit


To close the tailgate, hold the tailgatehandle, lower the tailgate, then pressdown on the back edge.Keep the tailgate closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thetailgate and to prevent exhaust gasfrom getting into the interior. SeeCarbon Monoxide Hazard on page53.

Unlocking the Tailgate

On Sport model and Canadian LX modelIf the power door lock system cannotunlock the tailgate, unlock itmanually.Place a cloth on the edge of thecover, then use a small flat-tippedscrewdriver to remove the cover onthe back of the tailgate.

Push the release lever to the right asshown.If you need to unlock the tailgatemanually, it means there is aproblem with the tailgate. Have thevehicle checked by your dealer.

TAILGATE HANDLE

Lock Unlock

Tailgate

89

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


On Sport model and Canadian LX modelLOCK－ Press this button once tolock all doors and the tailgate. Someexterior lights will flash once. Whenyou push LOCK twice within 5seconds, the horn will sound to verifythat the doors and the tailgate arelocked and the security system (ifequipped) has set. You cannot lockthe doors and the tailgate if any dooror the tailgate is not fully closed orthe key is in the ignition switch.

UNLOCK－ Press this button onceto unlock the driver's door. Push ittwice to unlock the remaining doorsand the tailgate. Some exterior lightswill flash twice each time you pressthe button.The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the door activatedposition) will come on when youpress the UNLOCK button. If you donot open any door or the tailgatewithin 30 seconds, the light fadesout. If you relock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitterbefore 30 seconds have elapsed, thelight will go off immediately.If you do not open any door or thetailgate within 30 seconds, they willautomatically relock and the securitysystem (if equipped) will set.

PANIC－ Press this button forabout 2 seconds to attract attention:the horn will sound, and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter, or turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

Remote Transmitter

90 2009 Fit


Remote Transmitter Care● Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

● Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

● Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

● If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Replacing the Transmitter BatteryIf it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doorsand the tailgate, replace the batteryas soon as possible.Battery type: CR1616

To replace the battery:1. Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

SCREW

CONTINUED

Remote Transmitter

91

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


2. Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

3. Inside the transmitter, separate theinner cover from the keypad bycarefully prying on the edge with acoin.

4. Remove the old battery, and inserta new battery into the back of thecover with the＋ side facing down.An improperly disposed of batterycan hurt the environment. Alwaysconfirm local regulations forbattery disposal.

5. Install the parts in reverse order.

As required by the FCC: This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.



BATTERY

Remote Transmitter

92 2009 Fit


Front Seat AdjustmentsSee pages 11 － 12 for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

Make all seat adjustments before youstart driving.

To adjust the seat forward orbackward, pull up on the bar underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position, andrelease the bar. Try to move the seatto make sure it is locked in position.

To change the seat-back angle, pullup the lever on the outside of theseat bottom.Once a seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked in position.

CONTINUED

Seats

93

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


Armrest

On Sport model and Canadian LX modelThe driver's seat has an armrest onthe side of the seat-back. To use,pivot it down.

Rear Seat Adjustments

You can adjust the angle of the rearseat-backs separately. To change theseat-back angle, pull up the releaselever on the outer side of the seat-back.

Head RestraintsSee page 13 for important safetyinformation and a warning aboutimproperly positioning head restraints.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the center of the backof the occupant's head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

RELEASE LEVER

Seats

94 2009 Fit


Adjusting the Head RestraintThe head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust arestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pullupward. To lower the restraint, pushthe release button sideways, andpush the restraint down.

When a passenger is seated in therear center seating position, thecenter head restraint should beadjusted up or down, to match thepassenger's height.

Removing the Head RestraintTo remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release button,then pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

Failure to reinstall the headrestraints can result in severeinjury during a crash.

Always replace the headrestraints before driving.

When reinstalling a head restraint,put the legs back in place. Thenadjust it to the appropriate heightwhile pressig the release button.Make sure the head restraint locks inposition when you reinstall it.

Front

RELEASE BUTTON

CUSHION

LEGSSEAT-BACK

Rear CenterPosition

RELEASE BUTTON

CUSHION

LEGSSEAT-BACK

CONTINUED

Seats

95

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


Active Head Restraints

The driver's and front passenger'sseats have active head restraints. If thevehicle is struck severely from the rear,the occupant properly secured with theseat belt will be pushed against theseat-back and the head restraint willautomatically move forward.

This reduces the distance between therestraint and the occupant’s head. Italso helps protect the occupantsagainst whiplash and injuries to theneck and upper spine.

After a collision, the activated restraintshould return to its normal position.

If the restraints do not return to theirnormal position, or in the event of asevere collision, have the vehicleinspected by a Honda dealer.

For a head restraint system to workproperly:● Do not hang any items on the headrestraints, or from the restraintlegs.

● Do not place any object betweenan occupant and the seat-back.

● Install each restraint in its properlocation.

● Only use genuine Hondareplacement head restraints.

Seats

96 2009 Fit


Folding the Rear Seat UpThe left and right rear seat cushionscan be lifted up separately to makeroom for cargo.Remove any items from the seatbefore you fold up the seat cushion.

Pull up the rear seat cushion, andfold the seat leg down. Push the seatcushion firmly against the seat-backto lock it.

To return the seat cushion to itsoriginal position, first make surethere are no items on the floor, thenpull up the seat leg fully, and pushdown the seat cushion slowly whileholding it with your hands. Set theseat leg in the floor guide. A latchcomes out when the leg is setproperly.

Folding the Rear Seat DownThe rear seat-backs can be foldeddown for more cargo room.Each side folds down separately, soyou can still carry a passenger in therear outer seating position.Remove any items from the seatbefore folding down the seat-back.Make sure there are no items on thefloor before folding down the seats.

FLOOR GUIDE

LEG

LATCH

CONTINUED

Seats

97

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


When you fold down the driver's siderear seat, use the latch plate torelease the center seat belt from thedetachable anchor (see page 99).Allow the seat belt to retract into theholder on the ceiling, and store thebuckles in it.

1. Lower the rear head restraints toits lowest position. If you folddown the driver's side seat-back,also adjust the rear center headrestraint to its lowest position.

2. Pull up the release lever on theoutside of the seat-back.

3. Fold the seat-back forward.

Do not put any heavy items on theseat-back when it is folded down.While lifting the seat-back, the seatcushion may come up with it. Tosecure the seat cushion, see page 97.Make sure the seat-back and seatcushion are locked securely and allrear shoulder belts are positioned infront of the rear seat-backs. In thecenter seating position of the rearseat, be sure the detachable anchoris latched securely before using theseat belt (see page 99).Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard (See Carrying Cargoon page 208).

LATCH PLATERELEASE LEVER

Seats

98 2009 Fit


Detachable AnchorThe seat belt in the rear center seatis equipped with a detachableanchor.This allows the center seat belt to beunlatched when the driver's side rearseat is folded.

Using a seat belt with thedetachable anchor unlatchedincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Before using the seat belt,make sure the detachableanchor is correctly latched.

Pull out the small latch plate and thelatch plate from each holding slot inthe ceiling, and pull out the seat beltto extend it.

Line up the triangle marks on thesmall latch plate and anchor bucklewhen reattaching the belt andbuckle.Tug on the seat belt to verify that thedetachable anchor is securelylatched. Make sure the seat belt isnot twisted.

SMALL LATCH PLATE

LATCH PLATE SMALL LATCH PLATE

TRIANGLE MARKS

ANCHORBUCKLE

CONTINUED

Seats

99

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


To unlatch the detachable anchor,insert the latch plate into the slot onthe side of the anchor buckle. Storethe detachable anchor and seat beltlatch plates in the retractor housing.

Power Windows

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position to raise or lower anywindow. To open a window, push theswitch down and hold it. Release theswitch when you want the window tostop. Pull back on the switch andhold it to close the window.The windows will operate for up to 10minutes after you turn off the ignitionswitch. Opening either front doorcancels this function.

Closing a power window onsomeone's hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

When you push the MAIN switch in,the switch is off, and the passengerwindows cannot be raised orlowered. To cancel this feature, pushon the switch again to get it to popout. Keep the MAIN switch off whenyou have children in the vehicle sothey do not injure themselves byoperating the windowsunintentionally.

LATCH PLATE

ANCHORBUCKLE

DRIVER'S WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Seats, Power Windows

100 2009 Fit


AUTO－ To open or close thedriver's window, push or pull thewindow switch firmly down or up tothe second detent, and release it.The window will automatically godown or up all the way. To stop thewindow, pull or push the windowswitch briefly.AUTO REVERSE － If the driver’swindow senses any obstacle while itis closing automatically, it willreverse direction, and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

Mirrors

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

2. Move the selector switch to L(driver's side) or R (passenger'sside).

TAB SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

CONTINUED

Power Windows, Mirrors

101

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


3. Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

4. When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns the adjustmentswitch off to keep your settings.

Heated Mirrors

On Canadian Sport and LX modelsThe outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off. Pressing this button alsoturns the rear window defogger onand off.

Parking Brake

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page 60).

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Mirrors, Parking Brake

102 2009 Fit


Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles. A beeper will sound ifthe vehicle is driven with the parkingbrake on.

Parking Brake

103

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


SEAT-BACK POCKETꭧ1

COAT HOOK

FRONT DOOR POCKET

VANITY MIRRORSSUN VISOR

SEAT UNDER BOX

CENTER POCKET

PASSENGER'S TRAY

UPPER GLOVE BOX

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

BEVERAGEHOLDER

REAR SIDE POCKET(RIGHT SIDE)

LOWER GLOVE BOX

BEVERAGE HOLDERSCARGO FLOOR BOXꭧ2

ꭧ1: If equippedꭧ2: All Canadian models with automatic transmission

Interior Convenience Items

104 2009 Fit


Lower Glove Box

Open the lower glove box by pullingthe bottom of the handle. Close itwith a firm push.

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Upper Glove Box

Open the upper glove box by pullingup on the lever. Close it with a firmpush.


105

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


Beverage Holders

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you open or close thedoors. Use only resealable containersin the door pockets.Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

Seat Under Box

Pull up the driver's side rear seatcushion (see page 97).Open the seat under box by turningthe knob.To close the seat under box, turn theknob and align the marks.

Accessory Power SocketThis socket is intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessories thatare rated 120 watts or less (10 amps).To use the accessory power socket,pull up the cover. The ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.It will not power an automotive typecigarette lighter element.Sun VisorTo use the sun visor, pull it down.When using the sun visor for theside window, remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing it out.Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

KNOB

MARKSSEAT UNDER BOX


106 2009 Fit


Ceiling Light

The ceiling light has a three-positionswitch: ON, Door Activated, andOFF. In the Door Activated (center)position, the light comes on whenyou:● Open any door.● Unlock the doors and the tailgatewith the key or the remotetransmitter (if equipped).

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight fades out in about 30 seconds.The ceiling light (with the switch inthe door activated position) comes onwhen you remove the key from theignition switch. If you do not open adoor, the light fades out in about 30seconds.If you leave any door open withoutthe key in the ignition switch, theceiling light will go off after 15minutes.

DOOR ACTIVATED

ON

OFF

Interior Lights

107

Instruments

andControls

2009 Fit


108 2009 Fit


The heating and air conditioningsystem in your vehicle provides acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system has manyfeatures. This section describesthose features and how to use them.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps todiscourage vandalism and theft ofyour vehicle.

Vents, Heating, and A/C............. 110Playing the FM/AM Radio

(Models without navigationsystem) ............................... 115

Playing a Disc (Models withoutnavigation system).................. 122

Disc Player Error Messages(Models without navigationsystem) ............................... 128

Playing an iPod® (Models withoutnavigation system).................. 129

iPod® Error Messages (Modelswithout navigation system) ..... 135

Playing a USB Flash MemoryDevice (Models withoutnavigation system) .............. 136

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages (Models withoutnavigation system) .............. 142

Playing the AM/FM Radio(Models with navigationsystem) ............................... 143

Playing a Disc (Models withnavigation system).................. 149

Disc Player Error Messages(Models with navigationsystem) ............................... 157

Playing a PC card (Models withnavigation system).................. 158

Playing an iPod® (Models withnavigation system).................. 170

iPod® Error Messages (Modelswith navigation system) .......... 176

Playing a USB Flash MemoryDevice (Models withnavigation system) .............. 177

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages (Models withnavigation system) .............. 183

FM/AM Radio Reception............ 184Protecting Your Discs ................. 186Remote Audio Controls ............... 189Auxiliary Input Jack .................... 190Radio Theft Protection ................ 191Setting the Clock......................... 192Security System .......................... 193Cruise Control ............................ 194

Features

109

Features

2009 Fit


ꭧ: If equipped

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

FAN CONTROL DIAL

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTONꭧ

FRESH AIR/RECIRCULATION LEVER

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER/HEATED MIRRORS BUTTONꭧ

MODE CONTROL DIAL

Vents, Heating, and A/C

110 2009 Fit


Airflow ControlsFan Control DialTurn this dial to increase or decreasethe fan speed and airflow.Temperature Control DialTurning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.Air Conditioning (A/C) ButtonIf equippedThis button turns the airconditioning on and off. Theindicator in the button is on when theA/C is on.Fresh Air/Recirculation LeverThis lever controls the source of theair going into the system. When youslide the lever to the side, air isbrought in from outside the vehicle(fresh air mode). When you selectthe side, air from the vehicle'sinterior is sent through the systemagain (recirculation mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are at thebase of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.The system should be left in fresh airmode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

Rear Window Defogger Button /

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page 76).On some models, this button alsooperates the heated outside mirrors(see page 102).

Mode Control DialUse the mode control dial to selectthe vents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

Air flows from the center andcorner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided between thevents in the dashboard and the floorvents.

Air flows from the floor vents.

Airflow is divided between thefloor vents and defroster vents at thebase of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

CONTINUED


111

Features

2009 Fit


When you select or , thesystem automatically turns on theA/C (if equipped). You cannot turnthe A/C off in this mode.VentilationThe flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then dischargesit through vents near the tailgate.1. Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.

2. Make sure the A/C is off.

3. Select and .

4. Set the fan to the desired speed.

Using the HeaterThe heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

1. Select and .

2. Set the fan to the desired speed.3. Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Using the A/CIf equippedAir conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Check the hightemperature indicator (see page 63).If the indicator begins to blink, turnoff the A/C until the indicator goesoff.1. Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.

2. Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.

3. Select .

4. If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select .

5. Set the fan to the desired speed.


112 2009 Fit


If the interior is very warm, you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan to maximumspeed in .Dehumidify the InteriorAir conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry andcan prevent the windows fromfogging up.1. Turn the fan on.2. If the A/C is off, turn it on (ifequipped).

3. Select and .Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To Defog and DefrostTo remove fog from the inside of thewindows:1. Set the fan to the desired speed orhigh for faster defrosting.

2. Select by sliding the lever.

3. Select . The systemautomatically turns on the A/C (ifequipped). The A/C indicator willnot come on if it was previously off.

4. Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.

5. Select / to help clear therear window.

6. To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

When you select or , thesystem automatically turns on theA/C. This helps to dehumidify the airand to defog the windshield. In eithermode, you cannot turn off the A/C.When you switch to another mode,the A/C returns to its originalsetting, either on or off, as indicatedby the A/C indicator.

CONTINUED


113

Features

2009 Fit


To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows1. Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

2. Select . The systemautomatically turns on the A/C (ifequipped). The A/C indicator doesnot come on if it was previously off.

3. Select .To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating each vent. This sends morewarm air to the windshield defrostervents. Once the windshield is clear,select fresh air mode to avoidfogging the windows.For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

To Turn Everything OffTurning the fan speed control dial allthe way to the left shuts the systemoff.● Keep the system off for shortperiods only.

● To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.


114 2009 Fit


ꂺPLAY BUTTON

POWER ( ꂻ ) BUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

FM/AM BUTTON

TUNE/SEEK( ꀾSEEK)BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

SCAN BUTTONSOUND ( ꂼ/ꂽ ) BUTTON

DISPLAY ꂹ ꂾ BUTTON

VOL/SELECTKNOB

AUTO SELECTBUTTON

TUNE/SEEK( ꀽSEEK)BUTTON

CONTINUED

Playing the FM/AM Radio (Models without navigation system)

115

Features

2009 Fit


To Play the FM/AM RadioThe ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing theFM/AM button. Adjust the volumeby turning the VOL/SELECT knob.The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are displayed.To change bands, press the FM/AMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction in AM is not available.To Select a StationYou can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.

TUNE－ Use the TUNE/SEEKbutton to tune to a desiredfrequency. Press the button totune to a higher frequency, and the

button to tune to a lowerfrequency.You can also operate the tunefunction by using the VOL/SELECTknob.Press the VOL/ SELECT knob andyou will see ‘‘ SEL ’’ in the display.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.To turn it off, press the VOL/SELECT knob or button, or

PLAY button.The system will return to the normaldisplay about 10 seconds after youstop adjusting the tune mode.

SEEK－ The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE/SEEK button until youhear a beep, then release it.SCAN－ The scan function samplesall stations with strong signals on theselected band. To activate it, pressthe SCAN button, then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds.If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.


116 2009 Fit


PRESET－ Each preset button (1－6) can store one frequency on AM,and two frequencies on FM.1. Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

2. Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

3. Pick a preset number (1－6), andhold it until you hear a beep.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

AUTO SELECT － If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘ A. SEL ’’flashes in the display, and the systemgoes into scan mode for severalseconds. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM and twelve FM stations in thepreset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘ 0 ’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if auto selectcannot find a strong station for thatpreset button.If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can store otherfrequencies on the preset buttons aspreviously described.To turn off auto select, press the A.SEL (auto select) button. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.For information on FM/AM radiofrequencies and reception, see page184.

CONTINUED


117

Features

2009 Fit


Radio Data System (RDS)On the FM band, you can select afavorite station and display theprogram service name according tothe information provided by the radiodata system (RDS).Program Service (PS) Name DisplayThe program service name displayfunction shows the name of thestation you are listening to. With theaudio system on and the FM bandselected, you can turn this functionon or off. To switch the function between on

and off, press and release the TITLEbutton. With the system on, you willsee the ‘‘ RDS INFO ON ’’ messageon the display. If the station you arelistening to is an RDS station, thedisplayed frequency switches to thestation name.

If the station you are listening to isnot an RDS station, the displaycontinues to show the frequency withthe PS name display function on.When you turn off this function bypressing the TITLE button, thedisplay shows ‘‘ RDS INFO OFF. ’’

PROGRAM SERVICENAME DISPLAY ON


118 2009 Fit


Radio Data System (RDS) Category

On the FM band selected, you canselect the program category providedby the RDS. Press or PLAYbutton to display and select an RDScategory. The principal RDScategories are shown as follows;

ALL: All RDS category stationsROCK: Rock, classic rock and softrock musicCOUNTRY:Country musicSOFT: Adult hits and soft musicTOP 40: Top 40 hitsOLDIES: Nostalgia music and oldiesR & B: Rhythm and blues, and softrhythm and bluesRELIGION: Religious music andreligious talkCLASSIC: Classical musicJAZZ: JazzINFO: News, information, sports,talk, foreign language, personality,public, college, and weatherTRAFFIC: Traffic information

Press or PLAY button toselect an RDS category. The displayshows the selected RDS categoryname for about 10 seconds. You canuse the search or scan function tofind radio stations in the selectedRDS category. If you do nothingwhile the RDS category name isdisplayed, the selected category iscanceled.RDS Program SearchThis function searches up and downa frequency for the strongest signalfrom the frequencies that carry theselected RDS category information.This can help you to find a station inyour favorite category. To activate it,press the or side of theTUNE/SEEK button. You will seethe selected RDS category nameblinking while searching it. Whenthe system finds a station, theselected RDS category name will bedisplayed again for about 5 seconds.

RDS CATEGORY

CONTINUED


119

Features

2009 Fit


If the system does not find a station,‘‘ NOTHING ’’ will be blinking forabout 5 seconds, then the systemgoes back to the last selected station.

RDS Program SCANThe scan function samples allstations with strong signals on theselected RDS category. To activate it,press the SCAN button. You will see‘‘ SCAN ’’ in the display. The systemwill scan for a station with a strongsignal in the selected RDS category.You will also see the selected RDScategory name blinking whilesearching it. When it finds one, it willstop and play that station for about 10seconds.If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 10 seconds. When it playsa station that you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.If the system does not find a station,‘‘ NOTHING ’’ will be blinking forabout 5 seconds, then the systemgoes back to the last selected station.

You can use the RDS program searchor scan function even if the PS namedisplay function is off. In this case,the display shows a frequency inplace of a PS name.


120 2009 Fit


Adjusting the SoundPress the SOUND ( ) button toselect an appropriate setting: bass,treble, fader, balance, and SVC(speed-sensitive volumecompensation). Turn the VOL/SELECT knob to adjust the setting.BASS－ Adjusts the bass.TREBLE － Adjusts the treble.FADER－ Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound.BALANCE－ Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the VOL/SELECTknob to adjust the setting to yourliking. When the level reaches thecenter, you will see ‘‘ C ’’ in thedisplay.

SVC－ Adjusts the volume levelbased on the vehicle speed.The system will return to the audiodisplay about 10 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.Speed-sensitive VolumeCompensation (SVC)The SVC mode controls the volumebased on vehicle speed. The fasteryou go, the louder the audio volumebecomes. As you slow down, theaudio volume decreases.The SVC has four modes; SVC OFF,SVC LOW, SVC MID, and SVCHIGH. Turn the VOL/SELECT knobto adjust the setting to your liking. Ifyou feel the sound is too loud,choose low. If you feel the sound istoo quiet, choose high.This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory.

Audio System LightingYou can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage 76). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the system is turnedoff.


121

Features

2009 Fit


ꂺPLAY BUTTON

CD BUTTON

DISC EJECT( ꁎ ) BUTTON

RANDOMBUTTON

SEEK/SKIP( ꀽSEEK)BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

DISC SLOTꂹ ꂾ BUTTON

VOL/SELECT KNOB REPEAT BUTTON

SEEK/SKIP( ꀾSEEK)BUTTON

Playing a Disc (Models without navigation system)

122 2009 Fit


To Play a DiscTo load or play discs, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position.You operate the in-dash disc playerwith the same controls used for theradio. To select the disc player, pressthe CD button. You will see ‘‘ CD ’’ inthe display. The folder or tracknumbers are shown in the display.You can also select the displayedinformation with the TITLE button(see page 123). The system willcontinuously play a disc until youchange modes.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

The in-dash disc player can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inCD-TEXT, MP3, and WMA formats.When playing a disc in MP3 orWMA, you will see ‘‘MP3 ’’ or‘‘WMA ’’ in the display. You can seeup to 99 folders, and select up to 999tracks/files.

NOTE: If a file on an MP3 or WMAdisc is protected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays UNSUPPORTED, and thenskips to the next file.If you have a disc that is acombination of CD-DA tracks andMP3/WMA files, you can choose theformat to listen by pressing the CDbutton.Video CDs and DVDs will not workin this unit.A disc compressed in AAC formatcannot be played in this audiosystem.

CONTINUED


123

Features

2009 Fit


The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1), 24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)Bit rate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1),8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)Compatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session.Maximum layers (including ROOT):8 layersThe specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHzBit rate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbpsCompatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session.Maximum layers (including ROOT):8 layers

To Load a DiscInsert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way to play it. Youoperate the disc player with the samecontrols used for the radio. Thenumber of the current track is shownin the display. When playing a disc inMP3 or WMA, the numbers of thecurrent folder and file are shown.The system will continuously play adisc until you change modes.You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this unit.For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page186.Text Data Display FunctionEach time you press the TITLEbutton, the display shows you thetext data on a disc, if the disc wasrecorded with text data.

You can see the album, artist, andtrack name in the display. If a disc isrecorded in MP3 or WMA, you cansee the folder and file name, and theartist, album, and track tag.With the folder name, you will seethe FOLDER indicator in the display.The TRACK indicator is shown withthe file or track name.When you press the TITLE buttonwhile a disc without text data isplaying, you will see ‘‘ NO INFO ’’ onthe display.The display shows up to about 16characters of selected text data (thefolder name, file name, etc.).If the text data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator on thedisplay. Press and hold the TITLEbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown. You can see up to about31 characters of the text data.


124 2009 Fit


If you press and hold the TITLEbutton again, the display shows thefirst 15 characters again.If any letter is not available, it isreplaced with ‘‘ . ’’ (dot) in thedisplay. When the disc has no textdata, you will see ‘‘ NO INFO ’’ onthe display.You will also see some text dataunder these conditions:● When a new folder, file, or track isselected.

● When you change the audio modeto play a disc with text data or inMP3 or WMA.

● When you insert a disc, and thesystem begins to play.

When playing a CD-DA with textdata, the album and track name areshown in the display.With a disc inMP3 or WMA, the display shows thefolder and file name.

When you turn on the audio systemnext time, the system keeps yourselection with the TITLE button.To Change or Select Tracks/FilesYou can use the SEEK/SKIP buttonwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks (files inMP3/WMA mode).In MP3/WMA mode, use theor PLAY button to select folders inthe disc, and use the SEEK/SKIPbutton to change files.

SEEK/SKIP － Each time you pressthe button, the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack (files in MP3/WMA mode).Press the button to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skip tothe beginning of the previous track.To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the or button.

You can also operate the trackselection by using the VOL/SELECTknob. Press the VOL/SELECT knoband you will see ‘‘ SEL ’’ in thedisplay. Turn the knob to switch thetrack number. Press the VOL/SELECT knob or PLAY button toset your selection. To turn it off,press the buttton.

CONTINUED


125

Features

2009 Fit


In MP3/WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION－ To selecta different folder, press the or

PLAY button. Press thebutton to skip to the next folder, andthe PLAY button to skip to theprevious folder.You can also operate the folder andfile selection by using the VOL/SELECT knob. Press the VOL/SELECT knob and you will see‘‘ SEL ’’ in the display. Turn the knobto switch the folder number andpress the knob to set your selection.Turn the knob to switch the filenumber and press the knob to yourselection. To turn it off, press the

button repeatedly.REPEAT (TRACK/FILE REPEAT)－ To continuously replay a track(file in MP3/WMA mode), press theRPT button. You will see ‘‘ RPT ’’ inthe display. Press and hold the RPTbutton to turn it off.

In MP3/WMA mode

FOLDER-REPEAT－ This feature,when activated, replays all the fileson the selected folder in the orderthey are compressed in MP3/WMA.To activate folder repeat mode, pressthe RPT button repeatedly until yousee ‘‘ F-RPT ’’ in the display. Thesystem continuously replays thecurrent folder. Press and hold theRPT button to turn it off.Each time you press the RPT button,the mode changes from file repeat tofolder repeat, then to normal playing.RANDOM (Random within a disc)－ This feature plays the trackswithin a disc in random order. InMP3/WMA mode, all files in allfolders are played in random order.To activate random mode, press theRDM button repeatedly until you see‘‘ RDM ’’ in the display. Press andhold the RDM button to turn it off.

In MP3/WMA mode

FOLDER-RANDOM － Thisfeature, when activated, plays thefiles in the current folder in randomorder, rather than in the order theyare compressed in MP3/WMA. Toactivate folder random play, press theRDM button. You will see ‘‘ F-RDM ’’in the display. The system will thenselect and play files randomly. Thiscontinues until you deactivate folderrandom play by pressing and holdingthe RDM button.Each time you press the RDMbutton, the mode changes fromfolder random play, to within a discrandom play, then to normal play.


126 2009 Fit


SCAN－ The scan function samplesall the tracks on the disc in the orderthey are recorded on the disc (allfiles in the selected folder in MP3 orWMA mode). To activate the scanfeature, press the SCAN button. Youwill see ‘‘ SCAN ’’ in the display. Youwill get a 10 second sampling of eachtrack/file in the disc/folder. Pressand hold the SCAN button to get outof scan mode and play the last tracksampled.

In MP3/WMA mode

FOLDER-SCAN－ This feature,when activated, samples the first filein each folder on the disc in theorder they are recorded. To activatethe folder scan feature, press theSCAN button repeatedly. You willsee ‘‘ F-SCAN ’’ in the display. Thesystem will then play the first file inthe main folders for about 10seconds. If you do nothing, thesystem will then play the followingfirst files for 10 seconds each. Whenthe system samples the first file of allfolders, F-SCAN is cancelled, and thesystem plays normally.Each time you press the SCANbutton, the mode changes fromtrack/file scan to folder scan, then tonormal playing.

To Stop Playing a DiscPress the eject button ( ) toremove the disc. If you eject the disc,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadit after 10 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD button.Press the FM/AM button to switchto the radio while a disc is playing.Press the CD button to play the disc.If you turn the system off while a discis playing, either with the power ( )button or by turning off the ignitionswitch, the disc will stay in the drive.When you turn the system back on,the disc will begin playing where itleft off.Protecting DiscsFor information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page186 .


127

Features

2009 Fit


The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again. For theadditional information on damageddiscs, see page 187.The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out thedisc.Insert a different disc. If the new discplays, there is a problem with thefirst disc. If the error message cyclerepeats and you cannot clear it, takeyour vehicle to a dealer.

ErrorMessage Cause Solution

HEAT ERROR High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

UNSUPPORTEDTrack/File format notsupported

Current track will be skipped. The next supportedtrack or file plays automatically.

BAD DISCPLEASE CHECK

OWNERSMANUAL PUSH

EJECT

Mechanical Error Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 187). Insert the disc again. If the codedoes not disappear, or the disc cannot beremoved, consult your dealer. Do not try to forcethe disc out of the player.


OWNERSMANUAL

Servo Error


OWNERSMANUAL

DISC Error Check the disc for serious damage, signs ofdeformation, excessive scratches, and/or dirt(see page 187).

Disc Player Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

128 2009 Fit


ꂺPLAY BUTTON

USB INDICATOR

RANDOMBUTTON

ꀽSEEK(SKIP ＋)BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTONꂹ ꂾ BUTTON


ꀾSEEK(SKIP －)BUTTON

iPod INDICATOR


On Sport model

CONTINUED

Playing an iPod® (Models without navigation system)

129

Features

2009 Fit


To Play an iPodꭂ

This audio system can operate theaudio files on the iPodꭂ with thesame controls used for the in-dashdisc player. To play an iPod, connectit to the USB adapter cable in theupper glove box by using your dockconnector, then press the AUXbutton. The ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position. The iPod will also berecharged with the ignition switch inthese positions.The audio system reads and playssound files to be playable on theiPod. The system cannot operate aniPod as a mass storage device. Thesystem will only play songs stored onthe iPod with iTunes.iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.iPods that are compatible with youraudio system are listed below.

Model Firmwareꭧ

iPod 5G Ver. 1.2 or moreiPod classic Ver. 1.0 or moreiPod nano Ver. 1.2 or moreiPod nano 2ndgeneration

Ver. 1.1.2 or more

iPod nano 3rdgeneration

Ver. 1.0 or more

iPod touch Ver. 1.1.1 or moreiPhone Ver. 1.1.1 or more

ꭧ : Use the latest firmware.Use only compatible iPods with thelatest firmware. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.NOTE:

● Do not connect your iPod using aHUB.

● Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

● Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

● We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

In AAC format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, theaudio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,and then skips to the next file.


130 2009 Fit


Connecting an iPod

1. Open the upper glove box, and pullout the USB adapter cable.

2. Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

3. Install the dock connector to theUSB connector securely.

When the iPod is connected and theiPod mode is selected on the audiodisplay, the USB and iPod indicatorsare shown in the display. Afterloading, you will see Honda markꭧ

on the iPod. That means you canonly operate your iPod using thevehicle’s audio unit.ꭧ : It may take a few minutes for theHonda mark to display on the iPod. Ifthe display does not change, thisfunction is not supported on youriPod model or firmware.

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

Sample Display

OK to disconnect.

CONTINUED


131

Features

2009 Fit


If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at www.apple.com/ipod.

Text Data Display FunctionEach time you press the TITLEbutton the display mode switchesbetween the album name, the songname, the artist name, or name off(which turns off the text display).The display shows up to about 16characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator in thedisplay. Press and hold the TITLEbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown.

To Change or Select FilesUse the SKIP button while an iPod isplaying to select passages andchange files.

SKIP－ Each time you press the(SKIP +) button, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nextfile. Press the (SKIP－) button,to skip backward to the beginning ofthe current file. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previous file.To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or ) ofthe SKIP button.


132 2009 Fit


You can also select a file from any liston the iPod menu: playlists, artists,albums and songs, by using theVOL/SELECT knob. Push the VOL/SELECT knob to switch the displayto an iPod menu, then turn the VOL/SELECT knob to select a desired list.Press the VOL/SELECT knob to setyour selection.

The display shows items on theselected list. Turn the VOL/SELECTknob to select an item, then press theVOL/SELECT knob to set yourselection.If you select ‘‘ ALL, ’’ all available fileson the selected list are played.Pressing the button goes backto the previous display and pressingthe TITLE button cancels this settingmode.

To Select Repeat or Shuffle Mode:You can select any type of repeat andshuffle mode by using the RPTbutton or the RDM button.REPEAT－ This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe repeat feature, press the RPTbutton. You will see ‘‘ RPT ’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press the RPTbutton again.SHUFFLE ALL－ This featureplays all available files in a selectedlist (playlists, artists, albums orsongs) in random order. To activatethe shuffle all feature, press the RDMbutton. You will see ‘‘ RDM ’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press and holdthe RDM button.

Press the VOL/SELECT knob.

CONTINUED


133

Features

2009 Fit


SHUFFLE ALBUM － This featureplays all available albums in aselected list (playlists, artists, albumsor songs) in random order. The filesin each album are played in therecorded order. To activate theshuffle album feature, press theRDM button repeatedly. You will see‘‘ F-RDM ’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press and hold the RDM button.Each time you press the RDMbutton, the mode changes fromshuffle all play to shuffle album play,then to normal playing.

To Stop Playing Your iPodTo play the radio when an iPod isplaying, press the FM/AM button. Ifa disc is in the audio unit, press theCD button to play the disc.Disconnecting an iPodYou can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see ‘‘ OK toDisconnect ’’ messageꭧ in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you see‘‘ OK to Disconnect ’’ message in theiPod display before you disconnect it.Make sure to follow the iPod’sinstructions on how to disconnect thedock connector from the USBadapter cable.ꭧ : The displayed message may varyon models or versions. On somemodels, there is no message todisconnect.If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.

When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the display shows ‘‘ USBNO DATA. ’’iPod Error MessagesIf you see an error message in thedisplay, see page 135 .


134 2009 Fit


If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing an iPod,find the solution in the chart to theright. If you cannot clear the errormessage, take your vehicle to yourdealer.

ErrorMessage Solution

UNPLAYABLEFILE

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the iPod. There is apossibility that the files have been damaged.

UNSUPPORTEDVER.

Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.

iPod® Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

135

Features

2009 Fit


ꂺPLAY BUTTON

USB INDICATOR

RANDOMBUTTON

ꀽSEEK(SKIP ＋)BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

AUX BUTTONꂹ ꂾ BUTTON


ꀾSEEK(SKIP －)BUTTON


On Sport model

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models without navigation system)

136 2009 Fit


To Play a USB Flash MemoryDeviceThis audio system can operate theaudio files on a USB flash memorydevice with the same controls usedfor the in-dash disc player. To play aUSB flash memory device, connect itto the USB adapter cable in theupper glove box, then press the AUXbutton. The ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAACꭧ formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.ꭧ : Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 Mbyte orhigher. Some digital audio playersmay be compatible as well.Some USB flash memory device(such as devices with securitylockout features, etc.) will not workin this audio unit.NOTE:

● Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

● Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a HUB.

● Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

● Do not keep the USB flashmemory device in the vehicle.Direct sunlight and high heat willdamage it.

● We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.

● Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

● Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

The specifications for compatibleMP3 files are:– Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)

– Bit rate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/144/160/VBR kbps(MPEG2)

CONTINUED


137

Features

2009 Fit


– Supported standards:MPEG1 Audio Layer3MPEG2 Audio LSF Layer3

– Partition: Top partition only– Maximum layers: 8The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:– Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

– Bit rate:48 － 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)

– Supported standards:WMA version 7/8/9

– Partition: Top partition only– Maximum layers: 8The specifications for compatibleAAC files are:– Sampling frequency:8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz

– Bit rate:8－ 320 kbps

– Supported standards:MPEG4/AAC LCMPEG2/AAC LC

– Partition: Top partition only–Maximum layers: 8Even if recorded in MP3, WMA orAAC format, a file with unsupportedversion cannot be played. If thesystem finds it, the audio unitdisplays UNSUPPORTED, and thenskips to the next file.In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.

Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE


138 2009 Fit


2. Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB connectorcorrectly and securely.

When the USB flash memory deviceis connected, the USB indicator isshown in the display.

Text Data Display FunctionEach time you press the TITLEbutton, the display mode shows youin sequence, the folder name, the filename, the artist name, the albumname, the song name, or name off(which turns off the text display).The display shows up to about 16characters of the selected data. If thetext data has more than 16characters, you will see the first 15characters and the indicator in thedisplay. Press and hold the TITLEbutton until the next 16 charactersare shown.

To Change or Select FilesUse the SKIP button while a USBflash memory device is playing toselect passages and change files.

SKIP－ Each time you press the(SKIP +) button, the system skipsforward to the beginning of the nextfile. Press the (SKIP－) button,to skip backward to the beginning ofthe current file. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previous file.To move rapidly within a file, pressand hold either side ( or ) ofthe SKIP button.FOLDER SELECTION － To selecta different folder, press thebutton or PLAY button. Press the

button to skip to the nextfolder, and press the PLAY buttonto skip to the beginning of theprevious folder.

USB CONNECTOR

CONTINUED


139

Features

2009 Fit


To Select a File from Folder and FileLists

You can also select a folder or file byusing the VOL/SELECT knob. Pushthe VOL/SELECT knob to switch thedisplay to the folder or file list, thenturn the VOL/SELECT knob toselect a folder or file. Press the VOL/SELECT knob to set your selection.Pressing the button goes backto the previous display and pressingthe TITLE button cancels this settingmode.

To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes by using theRPT button or RDM button, or SCANbutton.REPEAT－ This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe repeat feature, press the RPTbutton. You will see ‘‘ RPT ’’ in thedisplay. To turn it off, press and holdthe RPT button.FOLDER REPEAT－ This featurereplays all the files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the folder repeat feature,press the RPT button repeatedly. Youwill see ‘‘ F-RPT ’’ in the display. Toturn it off, press and hold the RPTbutton.Each time you press the RPT button,the mode changes from file repeat tofolder repeat, then to normal playing.

RANDOM－ This feature plays allthe files in random order. To activatethe track random feature, press theRDM button. You will see ‘‘ RDM ’’ inthe display. To turn it off, press andhold the RDM button.FOLDER RANDOM－ This featureplays the files in the selected folderin random order. To activate thefolder random feature, press theRDM button repeatedly. You will see‘‘ F-RDM ’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press and hold the RDM button.Each time you press the RDMbutton, the mode changes from trackrandom play to folder random play,then to normal playing.

Folder Selection

Track Selection

Press the VOL/SELECT knob.


140 2009 Fit


SCAN－ This feature samples allfiles in the selected folder in theorder they are stored. To activate thescan feature, press the SCAN button.You will see ‘‘ SCAN ’’ in the display.You will get a 10 second sampling ofeach file in the folder. Press and holdthe SCAN button to get out of thescan mode and play the last filesampled.FOLDER SCAN－ This featuresamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. To activatethe folder scan feature, press theSCAN button repeatedly. You willsee ‘‘ F-SCAN ’’ in the display. Youwill get a 10 second sampling of eachfirst file in the folder(s). Press andhold the SCAN button to get out ofthe folder scan mode and play thelast file sampled.Each time you press the SCANbutton, the mode changes from filescan to folder scan, then to normalplaying.

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory DeviceTo play the radio when a USB flashmemory device is playing, press theFM/AM button. If a disc is in theaudio unit, press the CD button toplay the disc.Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDeviceYou can disconnect the USB flashmemory device in any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Always follow the USBflash memory device’s instructionswhen you remove it.When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the display shows‘‘ USB NO DATA. ’’If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.

USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessagesIf you see an error message in thedisplay, see page 142 .


141

Features

2009 Fit


If you see an error message on theaudio display while playing a USBflash memory device, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.


UNPLAYABLEFILE

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memorydevice. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.

UNSUPPORTED Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models without navigation system)

142 2009 Fit


SOUND ICON

SCANBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

AUDIOBUTTON

AUTO SELECT ICON

PRESET BUTTONS

BACK GROUND ICON

FM1 ICON

TUNE BAR

AM ICON

FM2 ICON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB

CONTINUED

Playing the AM/FM Radio (Models with navigation system)

143

Features

2009 Fit


Voice Control SystemIn addition to the standard audiocontrols, the audio system in yourvehicle can be operated using thevoice control system. See thenavigation section in your quick startguide for an overview of this system,and the navigation system manual forcomplete details.To Play the AM/FM RadioThe ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe power/volume knob.Pushing the AUDIO button will alsoturn on the system.

You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Use thecontrol buttons on the left side of thescreen. The status bar appears on thebottom of the screen each time youoperate any of the control buttons.On the navigation screen, you canalso see audio information bytouching the AUDIO INFO icon onthe lower of the screen.The band and frequency that theradio was last turned to aredisplayed. To change bands, pressthe AM/FM button, or touch thedesired band icon (FM1, FM2, orAM). On the FM band, STEREO willbe displayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

To Select a StationYou can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: tune, seek, scan, the presetbuttons, and auto select.TUNE－ Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tune toa higher frequency, and press theside to tune to a lower frequency.

Press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear twobeeps to change the frequencyrapidly. Release the bar when thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.


144 2009 Fit


SEEK－ The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press and hold the or side ofthe TUNE bar until you hear a beep,then release it.SCAN－ The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan fora station with a strong signal. Whenit finds one, it will stop and play thatstation for about 10 seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for 10 seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.Preset－ Each preset button canstore one frequency on AM and twofrequencies on FM.1. Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

2. Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

3. Pick a preset button, and hold ituntil you hear a beep.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

Each preset button's frequency isshown on the bottom of the audiodisplay.

CONTINUED


145

Features

2009 Fit


AUTO SELECT － If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.Press the AUDIO button to view theaudio control icons, then touch theAUTO SEL icon. You will see AUTOSEL flashing in the display, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘ 0 ’’ displayed afterpressing a preset button if auto selectcannot find a strong station for everypreset button.If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can store otherfrequencies on the preset buttons aspreviously described.To turn off auto select, touch theAUTO SEL icon . This restores thepresets you originally set.For information on FM/AM radiofrequencies and reception, see page184.

Adjusting the Sound

You can adjust the sound on thenavigation screen. To adjust thesound, push the AUDIO button, thenenter the sound grid by touching theSOUND icon on the display.

SOUND ICON


146 2009 Fit


BASS－ Adjusts the bass.TREBLE － Adjusts the treble. Toadjust the treble and bass, touchor on each side of the treble orbass adjustment bar. The adjustmentbar on the right lower display showsyou the current setting.

FADER－ Adjusts the front-to-backstrength of the sound. To adjust thefront/rear fader, touch the FR or RRicon.BALANCE－ Adjusts the side-to-side strength of the sound.To adjust the left/right balance,touch the L or R icon.The right upper display shows youthe current setting of the soundstrength coming from each speaker.SVC (speed-sensitive volumecompensation)－ The SVC modecontrols the volume based on vehiclespeed. The faster you go, the louderthe audio volume becomes. As youslow down, the audio volumedecreases. Touch the appropriateicon (Low, Mid, Hi, Off) to select themode.

This function is set to MID as thedefault setting when the vehicleleaves the factory. If you feel thesound is too loud, choose low. If youfeel the sound is too quiet, chooseHi.You can also select the icon with thejoystick. Move it up and down tomove the highlighting and scrollthrough lists. Select the icon, thenenter the joystick.The system will return to the audiodisplay about 10 seconds after youstop adjusting a mode.

SPEAKER SETTING

BASS/TREBLE SETTING

CONTINUED


147

Features

2009 Fit


Screen ModeYou can select the backgroundscreen to display the sound level.There are three screen modes: level(the sound level is shown with thevertical bars), spectrum analysis (thesound level appears as ripples ofwater), and off. Each time you touchthe background icon, the displaychanges.

Audio System LightingYou can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the control panel (seepage 76). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.


148 2009 Fit


POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

JOYSTICK

REPEAT BUTTON

CD ICON

RANDOMBUTTON

OPEN BUTTON

CD/AUX BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BAR

REWIND BUTTON

FAST FORWARDBUTTON

SKIP ꭚ BUTTON

SKIP ꬽ BUTTON

CONTINUED

Playing a Disc (Models with navigation system)

149

Features

2009 Fit


To Play a Disc(In-dash single player)You operate the in-dash disc playerwith the same controls used for theradio. To load or play discs, theignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.


This audio system can also playCD-Rs and CD-RWs compressed inMP3 or WMA formats. When playinga disc in MP3, you will see ‘‘MP3 ’’on the screen. In WMA format,‘‘ WMA ’’ will appear on the screen.You can select up to 255 folders andplay up to 999 tracks. If the disc has acomplex structure, it takes a while toread the disc before the systembegins to play it.

If you have a disc that is acombination of CD-DA tracks andMP3/WMA files, you can choose theformat to listen by pressing andholding CD/AUX button until youhear a beep.

Video CDs and DVD discs do notwork in this unit.

A disc compressed in AAC formatcannot be played in this audio system.


– Bit rate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)

– Compatible with variable bit rateand multi-session

–Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:– Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

– Bit rate:32/40/48/64/80/96/128/160/192kbps



NOTE:If a file on an MP3 or WMA disc isprotected by digital rightsmanagement (DRM), the audio unitdisplays FILE ERROR, and thenskips to the next file.


150 2009 Fit


To Load a Disc

The in-dash disc player is behind thenavigation screen. To use the discplayer, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the disc slot appears.

Insert a disc about halfway into thedisc slot. The drive will pull the discin the rest of the way and begin toplay it.You cannot load and play 3-inch (8-cm) discs in this system.

To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button onthe edge of the screen panel. Do notuse the folded screen as a tray. If youput a cup, for example, on the screen,the liquid inside the cup may spill onthe screen when you go over a bump.

OPEN BUTTON

DISC SLOT CLOSE BUTTON

CONTINUED


151

Features

2009 Fit


Press the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the in-dash disc player.You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press theCD/AUX button. The status barappears on the bottom of the screen.On the navigation screen, you cansee the audio information wheneveryou touch the AUDIO INFO orTRACK LIST icons on the lower ofthe screen.When playing a CD recorded withtext data, the track, album, and artistname are shown on the audiodisplay. When playing a disc in MP3or WMA, the folder number andname, the file number and name, theartist name, and the elapsed time areshown. The system will continuouslyplay a disc until you change modes.If the disc was not recorded with textdata, it will not be displayed.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

You can use the preset buttons whilea disc is playing to select passagesand change tracks (files in MP3 orWMA mode). Each preset button'sfunction is shown on the bottom ofthe screen.

You can also select an icon with thejoystick. Move it to left, right, up, ordown to change the highlighting andscroll through lists. Then press theENT on the top of the joystick toselect the icon.SKIP－ Each time you press(preset 6), the player skips forwardto the beginning of the next track(file in MP3 or WMA mode). Press

(preset 5), to skip backward tothe beginning of the current track.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous track.FF/REW－ To move rapidly withina track/file, press and hold(preset 4) or (preset 3).

PRESET BUTTON'S FUNCTION

PRESET BUTTONS


152 2009 Fit


In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SELECTION－ To selecta different folder, press either side ofthe TUNE bar to move to thebeginning of the next folder. Pressthe side of the TUNE bar to skipto the next folder, and the side tomove to the beginning of the currentfolder. Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.TRACK REPEAT (FILE REPEAT)－ To continuously replay a track(file in MP3 or WMA mode), pressthe RPT button (preset 1). You willsee ‘‘ TRACK REPEAT ’’ in thedisplay. Press the RPT button againto turn it off.

In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER REPEAT－ This feature,when activated, replays all files onthe selected folder in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrepeat, press and hold the RPTbutton (preset 1) for 2 seconds. Youwill see ‘‘ FOLDER REPEAT ’’ in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current folder. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.Selecting a different folder with theTUNE bar also turns off folderrepeat.TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a disc/folder)－ Thisfeature plays the tracks/files within adisc in random order. To activatetrack random, press the RDM button(preset 2). You will see ‘‘ TRACKRANDOM ’’ in the display. Press theRDM button again to return tonormal play.

In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER RANDOM － Thisfeature, when activated, plays all filesin the selected folder in randomorder, rather than in the order theyare compressed. To activate folderrandom, press and hold the RDMbutton. You will see ‘‘ FOLDERRANDOM ’’ in the display. Thesystem then selects and plays filesrandomly. This continues until youdeactivate folder random by pressingthe RDM button again, or if youselect a different folder with theTUNE bar.

CONTINUED


153

Features

2009 Fit


SCAN (TRACK/FILE SCAN)－The scan function samples all tracks(files in MP3 or WMA) in the orderthey were recorded. To activate scan,press the SCAN button. You will see‘‘ TRACK SCAN ’’ in the display. Youwill get a 10 second sampling of eachtrack/file on the disc. Press theSCAN button to get out of scan modeand play the last track/file sampled.Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 or 6) also turns off scan.

In MP3 or WMA mode

FOLDER SCAN－ This feature,when activated, samples all the firstfiles in each folder on the disc inorder. To activate folder scan, pressand hold the SCAN button for 2seconds. You will see ‘‘ FOLDERSCAN ’’ in the display.The system plays the first file in eachfolder for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system then plays thefirst file in each folder for 10 secondseach. After playing the first file of thelast folder, the system goes to normalplaying.Pressing either SKIP button (preset5 or 6), or selecting a different folderwith the TUNE bar, or pressing theSCAN button, also turns off folderscan.

Using a Track List

You can also select a track/filedirectly from a track list on the audiodisplay. Press the AUDIO button toshow the audio display, then touchthe Track List icon. The track listmenu appears on the display.

FOLDER ICON TRACK/FILE ICON

FOLDER NUMBER RETURN ICON


154 2009 Fit


When playing a CD recorded withtext data, each track name is shownon the audio display. With a discrecorded in MP3 or WMA, the foldernumber and the location are alsodisplayed.If the disc was not recorded with textdata, only the track number isshown.To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon on thescreen.

Select the desired track/file bytouching the icon on the display. Theselected icon will be highlighted inblue. The system begins to play theselected track/file. With a disc inMP3 or WMA, touch the folder iconon the upper left of the screen tomove to the root folder. The currentfolder is highlighted in blue.

To Stop Playing a DiscTo play the radio when a disc isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. Ifa PC card is in the audio unit, touchthe CARD icon to play the PC card.Press the CD/AUX button again ortouch the CD icon to switch back tothe in-dash disc player.If you turn the system off while a discis playing, either with the power/volume knob or by turning off theignition switch, the disc will stay inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the disc will begin playingwhere it left off.

CONTINUED


155

Features

2009 Fit


Removing a DiscTo remove a disc from the audio unit,fold back the screen by pressing theOPEN button (see page 150). Pressthe disc eject button ( ) to removethe disc. If you eject the disc, but donot remove it from the slot, thesystem will automatically reload itafter 10 seconds and put it in pausemode. To begin playing, press theCD/AUX button.To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.You cannot close the screen if a discis partially inserted into its slot.You can also eject the disc when theignition switch is off.

Protecting DiscsFor information on how to handleand protect discs, see page 186.


156 2009 Fit


If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to your dealer.The chart on the right explains theerror messages you may see in thedisplay while playing a disc.If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, pressthe eject button. After ejecting thedisc, check it for damage ordeformation. If there is no damage,insert the disc again.The audio system will try to play thedisc. If there is still a problem, theerror message will reappear. Pressthe eject button, and pull out thedisc.Insert a different disc. If the new discplays, there is a problem with thefirst disc. If the error message cyclerepeats and you cannot clear it, takeyour vehicle to a dealer.

ErrorMessage Cause Solution

CHECK DISC FOCUS ErrorPress the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check if it is inserted correctly in the disc player.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.

MECH ERROR Mechanical Error

Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the disc cannot be pulled out, or the errormessage does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your dealer.

CHECK DISC Disc Format Error Press the eject button, and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.

HEAT ERROR High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Disc Player Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

157

Features

2009 Fit


TRACK LIST ICON

POWER/VOLUME KNOB PC CARD ICON

JOYSTICK

OPEN BUTTON

PLAY MODEICON

CD/AUX BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

TUNE BAR

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

REWIND BUTTON

FAST FORWARD BUTTON

SKIP ꭚ BUTTON

SKIP ꬽ BUTTON

Playing a PC card (Models with navigation system)

158 2009 Fit


To Play a PC cardYou operate the PC card player withthe same controls used for the radioand the in-dash disc player. To loador play a card, the ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.The PC card player reads and playscards in MP3 or WMA formats.Depending on the format, the screenwill indicate ‘‘MP3 ’’ or ‘‘ WMA ’’when a card is playing. The card limitof the player is 255 folders and 999tracks. If the card has a complexstructure, it takes some time for thesystem to begin playing it.Based on PCMCIA 2.1/JEIDA 4.2,the recommended PC cards for thePC card reader are:CompactFlashFlash ATASD memory card

Always use the recommendedmemory card with the appropriateadapter (if an adapter is needed).Some memory cards will not work inthis unit.NOTE:

● When you insert a PC card into theslot, make sure you put it instraight. If you cannot insert it,remove it, and insert again.

● Do not keep PC cards in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage them.

● To avoid damaging the cardreader, do not insert hard discdrive cards into the PC card slot.

● You cannot close the screen (moveit to the upright position) until thePC card is inserted all the way intoits slot or removed.

● Never insert foreign objects intothe PC card slot.


– Bit rate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)



CONTINUED


159

Features

2009 Fit


The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:– Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

– Bit rate:48/64/80/96/128/160/192 kbps


– Maximum layers(including ROOT): 8 layers

In WMA format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, itskips that file and plays the nextavailable folder or file.

Loading a PC Card

The PC card slot is behind thenavigation screen. To use the PCcard player, press the OPEN buttonbeside the screen. The screen foldsback, and the PC card slot appears.

Insert a PC card straight into the slot.The drive will read the PC card andbegin to play it.Return the screen to the uprightposition by pressing the CLOSEbutton on the edge of the screenpanel.Press the AUDIO button beside thescreen to show the audio display andoperate the PC card player.You can also operate the audiosystem without using the controlicons on the audio screen. Press anyof the appropriate control buttons.The status bar appears on the bottomof the screen. On the navigationscreen, you can see the audioinformation whenever you touch theAUDIO INFO icon on the screen.

PC CARD SLOT


160 2009 Fit


There are three play modes: Folder,Artist, and Album. Touch the PLAYMODE icon, then choose one of themodes by touching its icon. When amode is selected, it is highlighted inblue.● Folder mode plays tracks in theorder they were added to the card.

● Artist mode plays tracks inalphabetical order, by artist andsong title.

● Album mode plays albums(folders) in alphabetical order.

If play mode information was notincluded in the tracks/files whenthey were added to the card, it willnot be displayed on the screen.

To Select a Play Mode

PLAY MODE ICON

FOLDER MODE

MODE INDICATOR

PLAY MODE ICON

ALBUM MODE

PLAY MODE ICON

ARTIST MODE

MODE INDICATOR MODE INDICATOR

CONTINUED


161

Features

2009 Fit


To select a play mode, push theAUDIO button to show the audiodisplay, then touch the PLAY MODEicon on the display.

Select the desired mode by touchingthe appropriate icon, or move thejoystick, then press the ENT.

After you select the play mode, thedisplay changes to the selectableplaying menu. If you select‘‘ Continue playing thecurrent song, ’’ the system goes intothe selected play mode after playingthe current file.

PLAY MODE ICON


162 2009 Fit


If you select ‘‘ Play a new track list, ’’the system goes into the selectedplay mode immediately and begins toplay the new track list.To go back to the previous screen,press the CANCEL button on theright side of the screen. To exit theplay mode screens, press the AUDIObutton.

To Change or Select Tracks/Files

You can use the preset buttons whilea card is playing to select or changefiles. Each preset button's function isshown on the bottom of the screen.

Icons on the screen can also beselected with the joystick. Move thejoystick left or right and up or downuntil the icon is highlighted, thenpress the ENT on the top of thejoystick to select the icon.

PRESET BUTTONS

PRESET BUTTON’S FUNCTION

CONTINUED


163

Features

2009 Fit


SKIP－ Each time you press(preset 6), the player skips forwardto the beginning of the next file.Press (preset 5), to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent file. Press it again to skip tothe beginning of the previous file.FF/REW－ To move rapidly withina file, press and hold (preset 4)or (preset 3).FOLDER SELECTION－ To selecta different folder, press either side ofthe TUNE bar to move the beginningof the next folder. Press the sideof the TUNE bar to skip the nextfolder, and to the side to move thebeginning of the current folder.Press it again to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

TRACK REPEAT (FILE REPEAT)－ To continuously replay a file,press the RPT button (preset 1). Youwill see ‘‘ TRACK REPEAT ’’ in thedisplay. Press the RPT button againto turn it off.FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMREPEAT－ This feature, whenactivated, replays all the files on theselected folder/artist/album in theorder they are recorded or listed. Toactivate each repeat mode, press andhold the RPT button (preset 1) for 2seconds. You will see ‘‘ FOLDERREPEAT, ARTIST REPEAT orALBUM REPEAT ’’ in the display.The system continuously replays thecurrent folder/artist/album. Pressand hold the RPT button again toturn it off. Pressing the RDM button,or selecting a different folder/artist/album with the TUNE bar also turnsoff the repeat feature.

TRACK RANDOM (Randomwithin a folder)－ This featureplays the files within a folder inrandom order. To activate randomplay, press the RDM button (preset2). You will see ‘‘ TRACKRANDOM ’’ in the display. Press theRDM button again to return tonormal play.FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUMRANDOM－ This feature, whenactivated, plays all files in eachfolder/artist/album in random order,rather than in the order they arerecorded or listed. To activate eachrandom play, push and hold theRDM button (preset 2) for 2 seconds.You will see ‘‘ FOLDER RANDOM,ARTIST RANDOM or ALBUMRANDOM ’’ in the display.


164 2009 Fit


The system then selects and playsfiles randomly. This continues untilyou deactivate each random play bypressing the RDM button again.SCAN－ The SCAN functionsamples all the files on the PC card inthe order they are recorded. Toactivate the scan feature, press theSCAN button. You will see ‘‘ TRACKSCAN ’’ in the display. You will get a10 second sampling of each file onthe PC card. Press the SCAN buttonagain to get out of scan mode andplay the last file sampled.Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 or 6) also turns off the scanfeature.

FOLDER/ARTIST/ALBUM SCAN－ This feature, when activated,samples the first file in each folder/artist/album on the PC card in order.To activate each scan feature, pressand hold the SCAN button. You willsee ‘‘ FOLDER SCAN, ARTISTSCAN or ALBUM SCAN ’’ in thedisplay.The system plays the first file in thefolder for about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system plays the firstfile in each folder, in order, for 10seconds each. After playing the firstfile of the last folder/artist/album,the system returns to normal play.

Pressing either of the SKIP buttons(preset 5 or 6), selecting a differentfolder/artist/album with the TUNEbar, or pressing the SCAN button,also turns off the scan feature.

CONTINUED


165

Features

2009 Fit


Using a Track List

You can also select a file directlyfrom a track list on the audio display.Press the AUDIO button to show theaudio display, then touch the TrackList icon. The track list menuappears on the display.

To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.To play a file, touch its icon on thescreen. In folder mode, touch thefolder icon on the upper left of thescreen to move to the root folder.The current folder is highlighted inblue.

In artist mode, the artist name is alsodisplayed on the right side of eachselectable icon. Select the desiredfile.

TRACK LIST ICON

FOLDER ICON

RETURN ICON

ARTIST NAME


166 2009 Fit


In album mode, the album name isalso displayed on the right side ofeach selectable icon. Select thedesired file.

Song Search Function

When you select ‘‘ Song Search ’’from the track list display, the songsearch menu appears.

You can then select any of threemodes to search a file: Title bykeyword, Artist, and Album.

ALBUM NAME

RETURN ICON

SONG SEARCH ICON

Folder mode is shown.

TITLE BY KEYWORD ICON

ARTIST ICON ALBUM ICON

CONTINUED


167

Features

2009 Fit


Searching for a Song Title by keyword

In Title by keyword mode, enter thetitle name, or any keyword, bytouching the letter icons on thescreen. Press the List icon to beginthe song search. If you press theCANCEL button on the controlpanel, the display returns to themode menu without doing a search.To cancel the selected letter, touchthe Delete icon. To select morecharacters, touch the More icon. Theother character list will be shown.

After the system searches for a song,a file list is displayed. To scrollthrough the list, touch the oricon on the side of the screen. Selectthe desired file by touching theappropriate icon, or moving thejoystick and pressing the ENT.

Searching for a Song by Artist Name

Select the Artist icon, and the artistlist appears. Select the desired artist,and the artist's file list is displayed.

MORE ICON

DELETE ICON LIST ICON

FILE LIST

ARTIST LIST


168 2009 Fit


Searching for a Song by Album Name

Select the Album icon, and the albumlist appears. Select the desiredalbum, and its song list is displayed.You can then select the desired songfrom the list.

To Stop Playing a PC cardTo play the radio when a PC card isplaying, press the AM/FM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. Ifa disc is in the audio unit, press theCD/AUX button or touch the CDicon to play the disc. Touch theCARD icon to switch back to the PCcard player.If you turn the system off while a PCcard is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or by turning offthe ignition switch, the card will stayin the drive. When you turn thesystem back on, the card will beginplaying where it left off.When you leave the vehicle, alwaysremove the PC card from the audiounit.

Removing a PC CardTo remove a PC card from the audiounit, fold back the screen bypressing the OPEN button (see page150). Press the eject button ( ) toremove the card. If you do notremove it from the slot, you cannotreturn the screen to the uprightposition.To return the screen to the uprightposition, press the CLOSE button.You can also eject a card when theignition switch is off.PC Card Player MalfunctionIf there is a problem with the PC cardplayer, see your dealer.

ALBUM LIST


169

Features

2009 Fit


iPod INDICATOR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB USB ICON

JOYSTICK

CD/AUX BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

SKIP ꭚ BUTTON

SKIP ꬽ BUTTON

Playing an iPod® (Models with navigation system)

170 2009 Fit


To Play an iPodꭂ

This audio system can operate theaudio files on the iPodꭂ with thesame controls used for the in-dashdisc player. To play an iPod, connectit to the USB adapter cable in theupper glove box by using your dockconnector, then press the CD/AUXbutton. The ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position. The iPod will also berecharged with the ignition switch inthese positions.The audio system reads and playssound files to be playable on theiPod. The system cannot operate aniPod as a mass storage device. Thesystem will only play songs stored onthe iPod with iTunes.iPod and iTunes are registeredtrademarks owned by Apple Inc.

Voice Control SystemYou can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.iPods that are compatible with youraudio system are listed below.

Model Firmwareꭧ

iPod 5G Ver. 1.2 or moreiPod classic Ver. 1.0 or moreiPod nano Ver. 1.2 or moreiPod nano 2ndgeneration

Ver. 1.1.2 or more

iPod nano 3rdgeneration

Ver. 1.0 or more

iPod touch Ver. 1.1.1 or moreiPhone Ver. 1.1.1 or more

ꭧ : Use the latest firmware.Use only compatible iPods with thelatest firmware. iPods that are notcompatible will not work in this audiounit.

NOTE:

● Do not connect your iPod using aHUB.

● Do not keep the iPod in thevehicle. Direct sunlight and highheat will damage it.

● Do not use an extension cablebetween the USB adapter cableequipped with your vehicle andyour dock connector.

● We recommend backing up yourdata before playing it.

In AAC format, DRM (digital rightsmanagement) files cannot be played.If the system finds a DRM file, theaudio unit displays UNPLAYABLE,and then skips to the next file.

CONTINUED


171

Features

2009 Fit


Connecting an iPod


2. Connect your dock connector tothe iPod correctly and securely.

3. Install the dock connector to theUSB connector securely.

When the iPod is connected and theiPod mode is selected on the audiodisplay, the iPod indicator is shownon the screen. After loading, you willsee Honda markꭧ on the iPod. Thatmeans you can only operate youriPod using the vehicle’s audio unit.ꭧ : It may take a few minutes for theHonda mark to display on the iPod. Ifthe display does not change, thisfunction is not supported on youriPod model or firmware.

USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

DOCK CONNECTOR

USB CONNECTOR

Sample Display

OK to disconnect.


172 2009 Fit


If the audio system still does notrecognize the iPod, the iPod mayneed to be reset. Follow theinstructions that came with youriPod, or you can find resetinstructions online at www.apple.com/ipod.

The current file number and total ofthe selected playable files aredisplayed on the screen. It alsoshows the artist, album and track(file) names on the screen.To Change or Select FilesUse the SKIP button while an iPod isplaying to select passages andchange files.SKIP－ Each time you press theSKIP + button (Preset 6), the systemskips forward to the beginning of thenext file. Press the SKIP－ button(Preset 5), to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious file.

To Select a File from iPod Menu

You can also select a file from any onthe iPod menu: playlists, artists,albums and songs. Press the AUDIObutton to display the screen, thentouch the iPod MENU icon.

Select the desired mode by touchingthe appropriate icon, or move thejoystick, then press the ENT.If you select ‘‘ ALL ’’ on either theartists or albums list, all availablefiles on the selected list are played.Press the AUDIO button to go backto the normal audio playing display.Pressing the CANCEL button goesback to the previous screen, andpressing the MAP button cancels theaudio control display on the screen.

CONTINUED


173

Features

2009 Fit


Using a Track List


To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.To play a file, touch its icon on thescreen. The current folder ishighlighted in blue.To Select Repeat or Random Mode:You can select any type of repeat andrandom mode by using the RPTbutton or RDM button.

REPEAT－ This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe repeat feature, press the RPTbutton (Preset 1). You will see‘‘ REPEAT ’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press the RPT button (Preset 1)again.TRACK RANDOM－ This featureplays all available files from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs) inrandom order. To activate the trackrandom feature, press the RDMbutton (Preset 2). You will see‘‘ TRACK RANDOM ’’ in the display.To turn it off, press the RDM button(Preset 2).

TRACK LIST ICON

RETURN ICON


174 2009 Fit


ALBUM RANDOM－ This featureplays all available albums from theselected items in the iPod menu list(playlists, artists, albums or songs) inrandom order. The files in eachalbum are played in the recoredorder. To activate the album randomfeature, press and hold the RDMbutton (Preset 2). You will see‘‘ ALBUM RANDOM ’’ in the display.To turn it off, press and hold theRDM button (Preset 2).You can also select another list fromthe iPod menu while keeping therandom function.NOTE:

Available operating function varieson models or versions. Somefunctions may not be available on thevehicle’s audio system.

To Stop Playing Your iPodTo play the radio when an iPod isplaying, press the FM/AM button ortouch the FM1, FM2, or AM icon. Ifa disc is in the audio unit, press theCD/AUX button or touch the CDicon to play the disc. If a PC card is inthe audio unit, Press the CD/AUXbutton or touch the CARD icon toplay a PC card.Press the CD/AUX button again ortouch the AUX icon to switch back tothe iPod.Disconnecting an iPodYou can disconnect the iPod at anytime when you see ‘‘ OK toDisconnect ’’ messageꭧ in the iPoddisplay. Always make sure you see‘‘ OK to Disconnect ’’ message in theiPod display before you disconnect it.Make sure to follow the iPod’sinstructions on how to disconnect thedock connector from the USBadapter cable.

ꭧ : The displayed message may varyon models or versions. On somemodels, there is no message todisconnect.When you disconnect the iPod whileit is playing, the navigation screenshows ‘‘ NO DATA. ’’If you reconnect the same iPod, thesystem may begin playing where itleft off, depending on what mode theiPod is in when it is reconnected.iPod Error MessagesIf you see an error message on thescreen, see page 176 .


175

Features

2009 Fit


If you see an error message on thescreen while playing an iPod, find thesolution in the chart to the right. Ifyou cannot clear the error message,take your vehicle to your dealer.


UNSUPPORTED Appears when an unsupported iPod is inserted.

NO SONG Information of music is nothing.

iPod® Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

176 2009 Fit


WMA/MP3 INDICATOR

POWER/VOLUME KNOB USB ICON

JOYSTICK

CD/AUX BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTON

SKIP ꭚ BUTTON

SKIP ꬽ BUTTON

TUNE FOLDERBAR

CONTINUED

Playing a USB Flash Memory Device (Models with navigation system)

177

Features

2009 Fit


To Play a USB Flash MemoryDeviceThis audio system can operate theaudio files on a USB flash memorydevice with the same controls usedfor the in-dash disc player. To play aUSB flash memory device, connect itto the USB adapter cable in theupper glove box, then press the CD/AUX button. The ignition switchmust be in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position.The audio system reads and playsthe audio files on the USB flashmemory device in MP3, WMA orAACꭧ formats. Depending on theformat, the display shows MP3,WMA or AAC when a USB flashmemory device is playing. The USBflash memory device limit is up to700 folders or up to 65535 files.ꭧ : Only AAC format files recordedwith iTunes are playable on thisaudio unit.

The recommended USB flashmemory devices are 256 Mbyte orhigher. Some digital audio playersmay be compatible as well.Some USB flash memory device(such as devices with securitylockout features, etc.) will not workin this audio unit.NOTE:

● Do not use a device such as a cardreader or hard drive as the deviceor your files may be damaged.

● Do not connect your USB flashmemory device using a HUB.

● Do not use an extension cable tothe USB adapter cable equippedwith your vehicle.

● Do not keep the USB flashmemory device in the vehicle.Direct sunlight and high heat willdamage it.

● We recommend backing up yourdata before playing a USB flashmemory device.

● Depending on the type andnumber of files, it may take sometime before they begin to play.

● Depending on the software thefiles were made with, it may not bepossible to play some files, ordisplay some text data.

Voice Control SystemYou can select the AUX mode byusing the navigation system voicecontrol buttons, but cannot operatethe play mode functions.The specifications for compatibleMP3 files are:– Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz (MPEG1)16/22.05/24 kHz (MPEG2)


178 2009 Fit


– Bit rate:32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320/VBR kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/144/160/VBR kbps(MPEG2)

– Supported standards:MPEG1 Audio Layer3MPEG2 Audio LSF Layer3

– Partition:Top partition only

– Maximum layers: 8The specifications for compatibleWMA files are:– Sampling frequency:32/44.1/48 kHz

– Bit rate:48 － 320/VBR kbps (Max 384)

– Supported standards:WMA version 7/8/9


–Maximum layers: 8The specifications for compatibleAAC files are:– Sampling frequency:8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz

– Bit rate:8－ 320 kbps

– Supported standards:MPEG4/AAC LCMPEG2/AAC LC


–Maximum layers: 8Even if recorded in MP3, WMA orAAC format, a file with unsupportedversion cannot be played. If thesystem finds it, the audio unitdisplays UNSUPPORTED, and thenskips to the next file.

In WMA or AAC format, DRM(digital rights management) filescannot be played. If the system findsa DRM file, the audio unit displaysUNPLAYABLE FILE, and then skipsto the next file.Connecting a USB Flash MemoryDevice


USB CONNECTOR

USB ADAPTER CABLE

CONTINUED


179

Features

2009 Fit


2. Connect the USB flash memorydevice to the USB connectorcorrectly and securely.

When the USB flash memory deviceis connected and the USB mode isselected on the audio system, theWMA or MP3 indicator is shown onthe navigation screen. It also showsthe folder and file numbers, and theelapsed time on the screen.

To Change or Select FilesUse the SKIP button while a USBflash memory device is playing toselect passages and change files.SKIP－ Each time you press theSKIP + button (Preset 6), the systemskips forward to the beginning of thenext file. Press the SKIP－ button(Preset 5), to skip backward to thebeginning of the current file. Press itagain to skip to the beginning of theprevious file.FOLDER SELECTION－ To selecta different folder, press either side ofthe TUNE FOLDER bar. Press the

side to skip to the next folder, andpress the side to skip to thebeginning of the previous folder.

Using a Track List


USB CONNECTOR

TRACK LIST ICON


180 2009 Fit


To scroll through the display, touchthe or icon on the side of thescreen. To go back to the previousdisplay, touch the Return icon.To play a file, touch its icon on thescreen. The current folder ishighlighted in blue.To Select Repeat, Random or ScanMode:You can select any type of repeat,random and scan modes by using theRPT button or RDM button, or SCANbutton.

TRACK REPEAT－ This featurecontinuously plays a file. To activatethe track repeat feature, press theRPT button (Preset 1). You will see‘‘ TRACK REPEAT ’’ in the display.To turn it off, press the RPT button(Preset 1).FOLDER REPEAT－ This featurereplays all the files in the selectedfolder in the order they are stored.To activate the folder repeat feature,press and hold the RPT button(Preset 1). You will see ‘‘ FOLDERREPEAT ’’ in the display. To turn itoff, press and hold the RPT button(Preset 1).TRACK RANDOM－ This featureplays all the files in random order. Toactivate the track random feature,press the RDM button (Preset 2).You will see ‘‘ TRACK RANDOM ’’ inthe display. To turn it off, press theRDM button (Preset 2).

FOLDER RANDOM－ This featureplays the files in the selected folderin random order. To activate thefolder random feature, press andhold the RDM button (Preset 2). Youwill see ‘‘ FOLDER RANDOM ’’ inthe display. To turn it off, press andhold the RDM button (Preset 2).TRACK SCAN － This featuresamples all files in the selected folderin the order they are stored. Toactivate the scan feature, press theSCAN button. You will see ‘‘ TRACKSCAN ’’ in the display. You will alsosee the file number blinking. You willget a 10 second sampling of each filein the folder. Press the SCAN buttonto get out of the scan mode. Thesystem plays the last file sampled.

FOLDER ICON

RETURN ICON

CONTINUED


181

Features

2009 Fit


FOLDER SCAN－ This featuresamples the first file in each folder inthe order they are stored. To activatethe folder scan feature, press andhold the SCAN button. You will see‘‘ FOLDER SCAN ’’ in the display.You will also see the folder numberblinking. You will get a 10 secondsampling of each first file in thefolder(s). Press the SCAN button toget out of the scan mode. The systemplays the last file sampled.

To Stop Playing a USB FlashMemory DeviceTo play the radio when a USB flashmemory device is playing, press theFM/AM button or touch the FM1,FM2, or AM icon. If a disc is in theaudio unit, press the CD/AUX buttonor touch the CD icon to play the disc.If a PC card is in the audio unit, pressthe CD/AUX button or touch theCARD icon to play a PC card.Press the CD/AUX button again ortouch the AUX icon to switch back tothe USB flash memory device.

Disconnecting a USB Flash MemoryDeviceYou can disconnect the USB flashmemory device in any time even ifthe USB mode is selected on theaudio system. Always follow the USBflash memory device’s instructionswhen you remove it.When you disconnect the USB flashmemory device while it is playing,the navigation screen shows ‘‘ NODATA. ’’If you reconnect the same USB flashmemory device, the system willbegin playing where it left off.USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessagesIf you see an error message on thescreen, see page 183 .


182 2009 Fit


If you see an error message on thescreen while playing a USB flashmemory device, find the solution inthe chart to the right. If you cannotclear the error message, take yourvehicle to your dealer.


UNPLAYABLEFILE

The system cannot read the file(s). Check the files in the USB flash memorydevice. There is a possibility that the files have been damaged.

UNSUPPORTED Appears when the unsupported USB flash memory device is inserted.

NO SONG Information of music is nothing.

USB Flash Memory Device Error Messages (Models with navigation system)

183

Features

2009 Fit


Radio FrequenciesThe radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.Those bands cover thesefrequencies:AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHzRadio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10 kHzapart (530, 540, 550). Stations on theFM band are assigned frequencies atleast 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘ FM101. ’’

Radio ReceptionHow well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station'stransmitter, nearby large objects, andatmospheric conditions.A radio station's signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station's signal.

Driving very near the transmitter of astation that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio's reception. Youmay temporarily hear both stations,or hear only the station you are closeto.

FM/AM Radio Reception

184 2009 Fit


Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station's transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user'sauthority to operate the equipment.

FM/AM Radio Reception

185

Features

2009 Fit


General Information● When using CD-R or CD-RWdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use.

● When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by thesystem.

● Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

● Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.


Protecting DiscsWhen a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the recordingsurface of the disc, causing skippingor other problems. Remove thesepieces by rubbing the inner andouter edges with the side of a pencilor pen.Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc player.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the disc to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

Protecting Your Discs

186 2009 Fit


Additional Information ofRecommended DiscsThe in-dash disc player has asophisticated and delicatemechanism. If you insert a damageddisc as indicated in this section, itmay become stuck inside anddamage the audio unit.Examples of these discs are shown tothe right:

1. Bubbled, wrinkled, labelled, and excessively thick discs

2. Damaged discs 3. Poor quality discs

Bubbled/Wrinkled

With Label/Sticker

Using PrinterLabel Kit

Sealed With PlasticRing

Chipped/Cracked

WarpedBurrs

CONTINUED


187

Features

2009 Fit


4. Small, irregular shaped discs 5. Discs with scratches, dirty discs

● CD-R or CD-RW may not play dueto the recording conditions.

● Scratches and fingerprints on thediscs may cause the sound to skip.

● Recommended discs are printedwith the following logo.

● Audio unit may not play thefollowing formats.

3-inch (8-cm) CD Triangle Shape

Can Shape Arrow Shape

Fingerprints, scratches, etc.


188 2009 Fit


On vehicles with navigation systemThree controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup (▲) or down (▼). Press the topor bottom of the button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,disc or a PC card (if a disc or a PCcard is loaded), or an audio unitconnected to the auxiliary input jackor the USB adapter cable.If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top (＋) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom(－) to go back to the previousstation. If you press and hold the CHbutton (＋) or (－), the system goesinto the seek mode. It finds a stationwith a strong signal.

If you are playing a disc, iPod or USBflash memory device, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack (file in MP3, WMA or AACformat) each time you press the top(＋) of the CH button. Press thebottom (－) to return to thebeginning of the current track/file.Press it twice to return to theprevious track/file.You will see the track/file numberand the elapsed time. If the disc hastext data or is compressed in MP3 orWMA, you can also see any otherinformation (track title, file name,folder name, etc.).

MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTONCH BUTTON

CONTINUED

Remote Audio Controls

189

Features

2009 Fit


In MP3 or WMA mode, you can usethe skip function to select folders.Press and hold the top (＋) of the CHbutton until you hear a beep, to skipforward to the first file of the nextfolder. Press the bottom (－) to skipbackward to the previous folder.If you are playing a PC card, pressthe top (＋) of the CH button toadvance to the next file. Press thebottom (－) to go back to theprevious file.

Auxiliary Input Jack

Your vehicle has the auxiliary inputjack on the front panel. The systemwill accept auxiliary input fromstandard audio accessories.When a compatible audio unit isconnected to the jack, press the CD/AUX (On vehicles with navigationsystem) or AUX (On vehicles withoutnavigation system) button to select it.

On vehicles with navigation system

On vehicles without navigation system

Remote Audio Controls, Auxiliary Input Jack

190 2009 Fit


Your vehicle's audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific digit code using thepreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from specific digits, makingthe system work without knowingthe exact code is nearly impossible.You should have received a card thatlists your audio system's code andserial numbers. It is best to store thiscard in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem's serial number in thisowner's manual.If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from a dealer. Todo this, you will need the system'sserial number.

If your vehicle's battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or theradio fuse is removed, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘ ENTERCODE ’’ in the frequency display thenext time you turn on the system.Use the preset buttons to enter thecode. On vehicles with navigationsystem, touch the Done icon to setthe code. The code is on the radiocode card included in your owner'smanual kit. When it is enteredcorrectly, the radio will start playing.If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thesequence, then enter the correctcode. You have 10 tries to enter thecorrect code. If you are unsuccessfulin 10 attempts, you must then leavethe system on for 1 hour beforetrying again.

Radio Theft Protection

191

Features

2009 Fit


On vehicles without navigation systemPress and hold the FM/AM(CLOCK) button until the displayedtime begins to blink, then release thebutton. Change the hours bypressing the 1 (H) button until thenumbers advance to the desiredtime. Change the minutes bypressing the 2 (M) button until thenumbers advance to the desiredtime.Press the FM/AM (CLOCK) buttonagain to enter the set time.You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, press the FM/AM (CLOCK) button until you hear abeep, then press the 3 (R) button toset the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is after thehalf hour, the clock sets forward tothe beginning of the next hour.

For example:1:06 will reset to 1:001:53 will reset to 2:00

On vehicles with navigation systemThe navigation system receivessignals from the global positioningsystem (GPS), and the displayedtime is updated automatically by theGPS. Refer to the navigation systemmanual for how to adjust the time.

1 (H) BUTTON

FM/AM (CLOCK)BUTTON

3 (R) BUTTON

CLOCK

2 (M) BUTTON

Setting the Clock

192 2009 Fit


On Sport modelThe security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables fromtheft. The horn sounds and acombination of headlights, parking/side marker lights and taillightsflashes if someone attempts to breakinto your vehicle or remove the audiounit. This alarm continues for 2minutes, then the system resets. Toreset an activated system before the2 minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver's door with the key or theremote transmitter.The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and the tailgate. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors and the tailgate from theoutside with the key, driver's locktab, door lock master switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem indicator on the instrumentpanel starts blinking immediately toshow you the system is setting itself.

Once the security system is set,opening any door, the tailgate, or thehood without using the key or theremote transmitter, will cause it toalarm. It also alarms if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.The alarm will also be activated if apassenger inside the locked vehicleturns the ignition switch on.

The security system will not set if thehood, tailgate, or any door is not fullyclosed. If the system will not set,check the door and tailgate openindicator on the instrument panel(see page 62) to see if the doors andtailgate are fully closed. Since it isnot part of the monitor display,manually check the hood.NOTE: To see if the system is setafter you exit the vehicle, press theLOCK button on the remotetransmitter within 5 seconds. If thesystem is set, the horn will beeponce.Do not attempt to alter this system oradd other devices to it.

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Security System

193

Features

2009 Fit


On Sport model and Canadian LX modelCruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Using the Cruise Control

1. Press the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

NOTE: The main switch can be lefton, even when the system is not inuse.2. Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

3. Press the SET/DECEL button onthe steering wheel. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel cruisecontrol. To resume the set speed,press the RES/ACCEL button. Theindicator on the instrument panel willcome back on.When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

CRUISE BUTTON

SET/DECEL BUTTON CANCELBUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

Cruise Control

194 2009 Fit


Changing the Set SpeedYou can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:● Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

● To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, the vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

● Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, then press the SET/DECEL button.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:● Press and hold the SET/DECELbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

● To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/DECELbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

● Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel goes out. Whenthe vehicle slows to the desiredspeed, press the SET/DECELbutton.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal causes the cruisecontrol to cancel.

CONTINUED

Cruise Control

195

Features

2009 Fit


Canceling Cruise Control

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:● Tap the brake or clutch pedal.● Press the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

● Press the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel.

Tapping either of the paddle shiftersshifts the gear up or down, but doesnot cancel the cruise control. Formore information on driving withpaddle shifters, see page 224.

Resuming the Set SpeedWhen you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h), and then press the RES/ACCEL button. The CRUISECONTROL indicator comes on. Thevehicle will accelerate to the samecruising speed as before.Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system off and erases theprevious cruising speed.

CRUISE BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

Cruise Control

196 2009 Fit


Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

Break-in Period ........................... 198Fuel Recommendation ................ 198Service Station Procedures ......... 199Refueling................................. 199Opening and Closing the

Hood................................... 200Oil Check................................ 201Engine Coolant Check ............ 202

Fuel Economy............................. 203Accessories and

Modifications .......................... 206Carrying Cargo ........................... 208

Before Driving

197

Before

Driving

2009 Fit


Break-in PeriodHelp assure your vehicle's futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:● Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

● Avoid hard braking for the first 200miles (300 km).

● Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Fuel RecommendationYour vehicle is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 87 or higher. Use ofa lower octane gasoline can cause apersistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise that can lead to engine damage.We recommend using qualitygasolines containing detergentadditives that help prevent fuelsystem and engine deposits.In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contact yourauthorized dealer for service.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to yourQuick Start Guide.

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

198 2009 Fit


Refueling1. Park with the driver's side closestto the service station pump.

2. Outside of the vehicle, push on theright side edge of the fuel fill doorin the middle. The fuel fill door willpop up slightly. Pull it outward toopen it.

3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the fuel fill cap in the holderon the fuel fill door. To prevent thefuel fill cap from becoming lost, itis attached to the fuel filler with atether.

4. Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘ top off ’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking offeven though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle's fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapor from going into theatmosphere. Try filling at anotherpump. If this does not fix theproblem, consult your dealer.

FUEL FILL DOOR

Push

Pull out

HOLDER

TETHER

FUEL FILL CAP

CONTINUED

Service Station Procedures

199

Before

Driving

2009 Fit


Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.● Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flameaway.

● Handle fuel only outdoors.● Wipe up spills immediately.

5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on untilit clicks at least once. If you do notproperly tighten the cap, themalfunction indicator lamp maycome on (see page 304). You willalso see a ‘‘ CHECK FUEL CAP ’’message on the informationdisplay.

6. Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Opening and Closing the Hood

1. Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle under the lower leftcorner of the dashboard. The hoodwill pop up slightly.

2. Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood near the center.Slide your hand to the left untilyou feel the hood latch handle.Push this handle up to release it.Lift up the hood.If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

HOOD RELEASE HANDLELATCH


200 2009 Fit


3. Holding the grip, pull the supportrod out of its clip. Insert the endinto the designated hole in thehood.

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop. Make sure itis securely latched.

Oil Check

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop).2. Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

3. Insert the dipstick all the way backinto its hole.

4. Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see Adding Engine Oil on page 253.

SUPPORT ROD

GRIP CLIP

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK


201

Before

Driving

2009 Fit


Engine Coolant Check

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see AddingEngine Coolant on page 256 forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer to Owner's MaintenanceChecks on page 250 for informationabout checking other items on yourvehicle.

RESERVE TANK

MAX

MIN


202 2009 Fit


Actual Mileage and EPA FuelEconomy Estimates Comparison.Fuel economy is not a fixed number.It varies based on driving conditions,driving habits and vehicle condition.Therefore, it is not possible for oneset of estimates to predict fueleconomy precisely for all drivers inall environments.The EPA fuel economy estimatesshown in the example to the right area useful tool for comparison whenbuying a vehicle. EPA estimatesinclude:City MPG－ Represents urbandriving in a vehicle in light traffic. Arange of miles per gallon achieved isalso provided.Highway MPG－ Represents amixture of rural and interstatedriving, in a warmed-up vehicle,typical of longer trips in free-flowingtraffic. A range of miles per gallonachieved is also provided.

Combined Fuel Economy－Represents a combination of city andhighway driving. The scalerepresents the range of combinedfuel economy for other vehicles inthe class.

Estimated Annual Fuel Cost －Provides an estimated annual fuelcost, based on 15,000 miles (20,000km) per year multiplied by the costper gallon (based on EPA fuel costdata) divided by the combined fueleconomy.

For more information on fueleconomy ratings and factors thataffect fuel economy, visit www.fueleconomy.gov (Canada: Visit www.vehicles.gc.ca)

(Sample U.S. EPA label shown)

City MPG

Combined FuelEconomy

Highway MPG

Estimated AnnualFuel Cost

CONTINUED

Fuel Economy

203

Before

Driving

2009 Fit


Fuel Economy FactorsThe following factors can lower yourvehicle's fuel economy:● Aggressive driving (hardacceleration and braking)

● Excessive idling, accelerating andbraking in stop-and-go traffic

● Cold engine operation (enginesare more efficient when warmedup)

● Driving with a heavy load or the airconditioner running

● Improperly inflated tires

Improving Fuel EconomyVehicle MaintenanceA properly maintained vehiclemaximizes fuel economy. Poormaintenance can significantly reducefuel economy. Always maintain yourvehicle according to the maintenancemessages displayed on theinformation display (see Owner'sMaintenance Checks on page 250).For example:● Use the recommended viscositymotor oil, displaying the APICertification Seal (see page253).

● Maintain proper tire inflation －An under-inflated tire increases‘‘ rolling resistance, ’’ whichreduces fuel economy.

● Avoid carrying excess weight inyour vehicle－ It puts a heavierload on the engine, increasing fuelconsumption.

● Keep your vehicle clean－ Inparticular, a build-up of snow ormud on your vehicle's undersideadds weight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fueleconomy.

Drive Efficiently● Drive moderately－ Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering, andhard braking increase fuelconsumption.

● Observe the speed limit －Aerodynamic drag has a big effecton fuel mileage at speeds above 45mph (75 km/h). Reduce yourspeed and you reduce the drag.Trailers, car top carriers, roofracks and bike racks are also bigcontributors to increased drag.

● Always drive in the highest gearpossible－ If your vehicle has amanual transmission, you canboost your fuel economy by upshifting as early as possible.

Fuel Economy

204 2009 Fit


● Avoid excessive idling－ Idlingresults in 0 miles per gallon.

● Minimize the use of the airconditioning system－ The A/Cputs an extra load on the enginewhich makes it use more fuel. Usethe fresh-air ventilation whenpossible.

● Plan and combine trips－Combine several short trips intoone. A warmed-up engine is morefuel efficient than a cold one.

Calculating Fuel EconomyMeasuring TechniquesDirect calculation is therecommended source of informationabout your actual fuel economy.Using frequency of fill-ups or takingfuel gauge readings are NOTaccurate measures of fuel economy.Fuel economy may improve over thefirst several thousand miles.

Checking Your Fuel Economy

1) Fill the fuel tank until the nozzle automatically clicks off.2) Reset trip counter to zero.3) Record the total gallons (liters) needed to refill.4) Follow one of the simple calculations above.

Milesdriven

Gallonsof fuel

Miles perGallon

100 Liter KilometersL per100 km

Fuel Economy

205

Before

Driving

2009 Fit


Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.AccessoriesYour dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories have beendesigned and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.Although non-Honda accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, and couldadversely affect your vehicle'shandling and stability.

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle's handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner's manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle'scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags, anti-lock brakes, andtire pressure monitoring system (ifequipped).

Before installing any accessory:● Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

● Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits (seepage 307) or interfere with properoperation of your vehicle.

● Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer for assistance.If possible, have your dealerinspect the final installation.

● Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows. Accessories installed inthese areas may interfere withproper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Accessories and Modifications

206 2009 Fit


Modifying Your VehicleRemoving parts from your vehicle, orreplacing components with non-Honda components could seriouslyaffect your vehicle's handling,stability, and reliability.Here are some examples:● Lowering your vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

● Raising your vehicle with a non-Honda suspension kit can affectthe handling and stability.

● Non-Honda wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and will not becompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS)ꭧ.

ꭧ : If equipped● Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle's anti-lock brakes andother systems.

● Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle'ssafety features can make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

CONTINUED

Accessories and Modifications

207

Before

Driving

2009 Fit


Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:● Upper glove box● Lower glove box● Front door pockets● Seat-back pocket (if equipped)● Center pocket● Cargo area side pocket● Cargo area, including the rearseats when folded up or down.

● Seat under box● Cargo floor box (all canadianmodels with automatictransmission)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle's handling, stability,stopping distance, tires, and make itunsafe. Before carrying any type ofcargo, be sure to read the followingpages.

REAR SIDE POCKET(RIGHT SIDE)

CARGO FLOOR BOX*2

FRONT DOOR POCKETS

SEAT-BACK POCKET*1

SEAT UNDER BOX CENTER POCKET

CARGO AREA

LOWER GLOVE BOX

ꭧ1: If equippedꭧ2: All Canadian models with automatic transmission

UPPER GLOVE BOX

Carrying Cargo

208 2009 Fit


Load Limits (Payload)The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg).See Tire And Loading Informationlabel attached to the driver'sdoorjamb.

Label Example

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit－(1) Locate the statement ‘‘ Thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXX kgor XXX lbs. ’’ on your vehicle'splacard.(2) Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.(3) Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkg or XXX lbs.

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

209

Before

Driving

2009 Fit


(4) The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For example,if the ‘‘ XXX ’’ amount equals 1,400lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 650 lbs.(1,400－ 750 (5 ꭦ 150)＝ 650 lbs.)(5) Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedon the vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.(6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your vehicle.

Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). Both are ona label on the driver's doorjamb.

Max Load (850 lbs) Passenger Weight(150 lbs ꭦ 2 ＝ 300 lbs)

Cargo Weight(550 lbs)





Carrying Cargo

210 2009 Fit


Carrying Cargo in the PassengerCompartment● Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

● Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver's ability to operate thepedals, the proper operation of theseats, or proper operation of thesensors under the seats.

● Keep the upper and lower gloveboxes closed while driving. If it isopen, a passenger could injuretheir knees during a crash orsudden stop.

● If you fold the rear seats up ordown, tie down items that could bethrown about the vehicle during acrash or sudden stop. Also, keepall cargo below the bottom of thewindows. If it is higher, it couldinterfere with the proper operationof the side curtain airbags.

Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area● Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

● Do not stack items higher than theback of the rear seats. They canblock your view and be thrownaround the vehicle during a crash.

● If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of carbon monoxidepoisoning, follow the instructionson page 53.

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

211

Before

Driving

2009 Fit


Cargo Hooks

The two or four hooks on the floorcan be used to install a net forsecuring items.

Your vehicle also has cargo hooks onside panel in the cargo area.They are designed to hold lightitems. Heavy objects may damagethe hook. Make sure any items puton each hook weigh less than 2.2 lbs(1 kg).

HOOKꭧ: If equipped

HOOKꭧ

Carrying Cargo

212 2009 Fit


This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate themanual and automatic transmissions.It also includes important informationon parking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the vehicle stability assist(VSA®), and the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS).

Driving Guidelines...................... 214Preparing to Drive ...................... 215Starting the Engine ..................... 216Manual Transmission ................. 217Automatic Transmission ............. 219Driving with the Paddle Shifters

(Sport only)............................. 224Parking ....................................... 229Braking System .......................... 230Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ............... 231Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®),

aka Electronic Stability Control(ESC), System..................... 233

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)................................... 235

Towing a Trailer.......................... 238Towing Your Vehicle Behind a

Motorhome............................. 238

Driving

213

Driving

2009 Fit


On Sport modelYour vehicle is designed to give youoptimum handling and performanceon well-maintained roads. As part ofthis design, your vehicle has aminimum of ground clearance.● Use caution if you ever drive yourvehicle on very rough or ruttedroads. You could damage thesuspension and underbody bybottoming out. Going too fast overparking lot ‘‘ speed bumps ’’ canalso cause damage.

● Curbs and steep inclines coulddamage the front and rearbumpers. Low curbs that do notaffect the average vehicle may behigh enough to hit the bumper onyour vehicle. The front or rearbumper may scrape when trying todrive onto an incline, such as asteep driveway or trailer ramps.

Driving Guidelines

214 2009 Fit


You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

2. Check that the hood is fullyclosed.

3. Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure (see page 273).

4. Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

5. Check the seat adjustment (seepage 93).

6. Check the adjustment of the insideand outside mirrors (see page101).

7. Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page 77).

8. Make sure the doors and thetailgate are securely closed andlocked.

9. Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page 14).

10. When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel (see page 59).

Preparing to Drive

215

Driving

2009 Fit


1. Apply the parking brake.2. In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reduce thedrain on the battery.

3. Manual transmission:Press the clutch pedal down all theway. The START (III) positiondoes not function unless the clutchpedal is pressed.Automatic transmission:Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

4. Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in the START (III) positionfor more than 15 seconds at a time.If the engine does not start rightaway, pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle from theft. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine's fuel system is disabled. Formore information, see page 79.

5. If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

6. If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, return tostep 5.

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air found ataltitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

Starting the Engine

216 2009 Fit


The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from fifth toreverse. When shifting up or down,make sure you push the clutch pedaldown all the way, shift to the nextgear, and let the pedal up gradually.When you are not shifting, do notrest your foot on the clutch pedal.This can cause the clutch to wear outfaster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoreverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into reverse, or shift into oneof the forward gears for a moment.This stops the gears so they won't‘‘ grind. ’’When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting, makesure the engine speed will not gointo the tachometer's red zone in thelower gear.

Rapid slowing or speeding upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

CONTINUED

Manual Transmission

217

Driving

2009 Fit


Recommended Shift PointsDrive in the highest gear that lets theengine run and accelerate smoothly.This will give you good fuel economyand effective emissions control. Thefollowing shift points arerecommended:

Shift up Normal acceleration

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

15 mph (24 km/h)27 mph (43 km/h)39 mph (62 km/h)53 mph (85 km/h)

Engine Speed LimiterIf you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into thetachometer's red zone. If this occurs,you may feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter in theengine's computer controls. Theengine will run normally when youreduce the rpm below the red zone.The engine speed limiter only workswhen you upshift; engine speed isnot limited during downshifts. Beforedownshifting, make sure the enginewill not go into the tachometer's redzone.

Manual Transmission

218 2009 Fit


Shift Lever Position Indicators

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in.The ‘‘ D ’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘ D ’’indicator, there is a problem with theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

Shifting

To shift from Park to any position,press firmly on the brake pedal andpress the release button on the frontof the shift lever, then pull the lever.You cannot shift out of Park whenthe ignition switch is in the LOCK(0) or the ACCESSORY (I) position.

U.S. Sport model

All models except U.S. Sport

U.S. Sport model is shown

RELEASEBUTTON

SHIFT LEVER

CONTINUED

Automatic Transmission

219

Driving

2009 Fit


All models except U.S. SportTo shift from: Do this:

P to RPress the brake pedal, andpress the shift lever releasebutton.

R to PN to RD3 to 22 to 1

Press the shift lever releasebutton.

1 to 22 to D3

D3 to DD to ND to D3

N to DR to N

Move the shift lever.

U.S. Sport modelTo shift from: Do this:

P to RPress the brake pedal, andpress the shift lever releasebutton.

R to PN to RD to S

Press the shift lever releasebutton.

S to DD to NN to DR to N

Move the shift lever.

Park (P)－ This positionmechanically locks the transmission.Use Park whenever you are turningoff or starting the engine. To shift outof Park, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the front of the shift leverto move it.If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release onpage 223.To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. You must also press therelease button to shift into Park. Theshift lever must be in Park beforeyou can remove the key from theignition switch.


220 2009 Fit


Reverse (R) － Press the brakepedal and press the release button onthe front of the shift lever to shiftfrom Park to reverse. To shift fromreverse to neutral, come to acomplete stop, and then shift. Pressthe release button before shiftinginto reverse from neutral.Neutral (N)－ Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly with theengine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.

Drive (D)－ Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.All models except U.S. SportDrive (D3) － This position is similarto D, except only the first three gearsare selected. Use D3 to provideengine braking when going down asteep hill. D3 can also keep thetransmission from cycling betweenthird and fourth gears in stop-and-godriving.

All models except U.S. SportSecond (2) － To shift to second,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever. This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gear whenyou come to a stop.Use second gear:● For more power when climbing.● To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

● For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

● To help reduce wheel spin.

CONTINUED


221

Driving

2009 Fit


All models except U.S. SportFirst (1)－ To shift from second tofirst, press the release button on thefront of the shift lever. This positionlocks the transmission in first gear.By upshifting and downshiftingthrough 1, 2, D3, and D, you canoperate the transmission much like amanual transmission without a clutchpedal.

U.S. Sport modelS position (S)－ To shift into the Sposition, press the release button onthe front of the shift lever, and movethe lever to S. This position is similarto D, except only gears from first tofourth are selected. The S positionkeeps the transmission from cyclingbetween fourth and fifth gears instop-and-go driving.With the shift lever in D or S, youcan also use the paddle shifters toshift the transmission up or down.With the paddle shifters, you canoperate the transmission much like amanual transmission without a clutchpedal. For more information ondriving with the paddle shifters, seepage 224.

Engine Speed LimiterIf you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into thetachometer's red zone. If this occurs,you may feel the engine cut in andout. This is caused by a limiter in theengine's computer controls. Theengine will run normally when youreduce the rpm below the red zone.


222 2009 Fit


Shift Lock ReleaseThis allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the release buttondoes not work.1. Set the parking brake.2. Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

3. Put a cloth on the notch of the shiftlock release slot cover. Using asmall flat-tipped screwdriver or ametal fingernail file, carefully pryon the notch of the cover toremove it.

4. Insert the key in the shift lockrelease slot.

5. Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to neutral.

6. Remove the key from the shift lockrelease slot, then reinstall thecover. Make sure the notch on thecover is on the left side. Press thebrake pedal, and restart theengine.

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have itchecked by your dealer.

NOTCH

COVER RELEASE BUTTON

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT


223

Driving

2009 Fit


Using the Paddle Shifters in Dposition (D-Paddle Shift Mode)U.S. models only

When you are driving in D position,you can shift the transmission up ordown manually with the paddleshifters.

To shift up or down, use the＋(right) or－ (left) paddle shifter oneach side of the steering wheel.

Each time you pull the＋ (right)paddle, the transmission shifts to ahigher gear. Pull the－ (left) paddleto downshift. You will see theselected gear number on theinstrument panel.When you pull either paddle shifter,the gear position indicator shows youthe selected gear number.When the transmission returns todrive mode (D), the displayed gearnumber disappears.

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

Driving with the Paddle Shifters (Sport only)

224 2009 Fit


Downshifting with the paddle shifterallows you to increase the enginebraking when going down steep orlong hills, and provides more powerwhen climbing uphills. You canupshift the transmission manually toreduce the rpm. Driving in thehigher gear helps fuel economy.The transmission control systemmonitors the accelerator pedal useand your driving conditions. Whenyou press the accelerator pedal as innormal driving, the system judgesthat you are driving at a constantcruising speed without using thepaddle shifters. Under theseconditions, D-paddle shift mode iscanceled, and the transmissionautomatically returns to drive mode(D).

The transmission remains in theselected gear if you do notaccelerate.Each time you pull either paddleshifter, the transmission shifts onegear up or down. If you want to shiftup or down more than two gears, pullthe paddle shifter twice, pause, andthen pull it again.The automatic transmission will notallow you to shift up or down if:● You downshift before the enginespeed falls below the upper limit ofthe lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gear positionindicator will flash the number of thelower gear several times, then returnto a higher gear.Here are the speed ranges fordownshifting.

To shiftfrom

Speed range

5→ 4 under 112 mph(181 km/h)

4→ 3 under 79 mph (127 km/h)

3→ 2 under 51 mph (82 km/h)

2→ 1 under 20 mph (32 km/h)

● You upshift before the enginespeed rises above the lower limitof the higher gear.

● You pull both paddle shifters at thesame time.

The transmission downshifts to firstgear and returns to drive mode (D)when the vehicle comes to acomplete stop or the vehicle speed isabout 6 mph (10 km/h).

CONTINUED


225

Driving

2009 Fit


When you pull and hold the ＋(right) paddle shifter, thetransmission automatically returns todrive mode (D).If there is a problem in thetransmission while you are drivingwith the paddle shifters, the Dindicator flashes, the D-paddle shiftmode is canceled, and thetransmission returns to drive mode(D).

Using the Paddle Shift in Sposition (Sequential Shift Mode)U.S. models only

With the shift lever in the S position,you can manually shift up or downwith the paddle shifters. Thetransmission goes into the sequentialshift mode and holds the selectedgear.To enter the sequential shift mode,press the release button on the frontof the shift lever, move the lever tothe S position, then pull either paddleshifter. To return to drive mode (D),move the shift lever to the Dposition. While you are driving in thesequential shift mode, thetransmission will not automaticallyreturn to drive mode (D).

When you move the shift lever from‘‘ D ’’ to the ‘‘ S ’’ position and pulleither paddle shifter, the gearposition indicator displays ‘‘M ’’along with the selected gear number.To upshift, pull the＋ (right) paddleshifter. To downshift, pull the－(left) paddle shifter.

GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

‘‘M’’ INDICATOR


226 2009 Fit


When you accelerate from a stop, thetransmission starts in first gear, andyou must manually upshift betweenfirst and fifth gears. Make sure youupshift before the engine speedreaches the tachometer's red zone.The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). Thereis no automatic downshift when youpush the accelerator pedal to thefloor.When you are driving in 4th or 5thgear, the transmission downshifts tothe lower gear under the followingconditions:● The vehicle slows down to acertain speed.

● You press the brake pedal.

Downshifting with the paddle shifterallows you to increase the enginebraking when going down steep orlong hills, and provides more powerwhen climbing uphills. You canupshift the transmission manually toreduce the rpm. Driving in thehigher gear helps fuel economy.The transmission also shiftsautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It downshifts to firstgear when the vehicle speed reaches6 mph (10 km/h) or less.The automatic transmission will notallow you to shift up or down if:● You downshift before the enginespeed falls below the upper limit ofthe lower gear.

If you try to do this, the gear positionindicator will flash the number of thelower gear several times, then returnto a higher gear.

If the vehicle speed decreases belowthe redline of the selected lower gearwhile the indicator is flashing, thetransmission downshifts, and theindicator displays the selected gear.● You upshift before the enginespeed rises above the lower limitof the higher gear.

● You pull both paddle shifters at thesame time.

CONTINUED


227

Driving

2009 Fit


Here are the speed ranges forupshifting and downshifting.

To shiftfrom

Speed range

1 → 2 over 0 mph (0 km/h)

2 → 3 over 6 mph (10 km/h)

3 → 4 over 21 mph (34 km/h)

4 → 5 over 27 mph (44 km/h)

To shiftfrom

Speed range

2 → 1 under 26 mph (42 km/h)

3 → 2 under 51 mph (82 km/h)

4 → 3 under 79 mph (127 km/h)

Starting in Second GearWhen you are in sequential shiftmode, and the vehicle is stopped,pull the＋ (right) paddle shifter toshift to second gear. You will see‘‘M2 ’’ in the display. Starting insecond gear helps to reducewheelspin in deep snow or on aslippery surface.


228 2009 Fit


Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make sure theparking brake is set firmly, or yourvehicle may roll if it is parked on anincline.If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Parking Tips● Make sure the windows areclosed.

● Turn off the lights.● Place any packages, valuables, etc.in the cargo area or take them withyou.

● Lock the doors and the tailgate.On Sport modelCheck the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

● Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

● If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gearand set the parking brake.

● If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gearand set the parking brake.

● Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Parking

229

Driving

2009 Fit


Your vehicle is equipped with frontdisc brakes. The brakes on the rearwheels are drum. A power assisthelps reduce the effort needed on thebrake pedal. The anti-lock brakesystem (ABS) helps you retainsteering control when braking veryhard.Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectivenessand reduces brake pad life. Inaddition, fuel economy can bereduced. It also keeps your brakelights on all the time, confusingdrivers behind you.Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces theireffectiveness. Use the engine toassist the brakes by taking your footoff the accelerator and downshiftingto a lower gear.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious and alert in your driving.Braking System DesignThe hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Brake Pad Wear IndicatorsIf the front brake pads needreplacing, you will hear a distinctive,metallic screeching sound when youapply the brake pedal. If you do nothave the brake pads replaced, theywill screech all the time. It is normalfor the brakes to occasionally squealor squeak when you apply them.

Braking System

230 2009 Fit


The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the wheels fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.The electronic brake distribution(EBD) system, which is part of theABS, also balances the front-to-rearbraking distribution according tovehicle loading.You should never pump the brake pedal.Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘ stomp and steer. ’’

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

ABS Indicator

If the ABS indicator comes on, theanti-lock function of the brakingsystem has shut down. The brakesstill work like a conventional system,but without anti-lock. You shouldhave your dealer inspect your vehicleas soon as possible.If the ABS indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as shown onpage 305.

CONTINUED

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

231

Driving

2009 Fit


If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the EBD system may alsobe shut down.Test your brakes as instructed onpage 305. If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.On vehicles with VSA systemThe VSA indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

Important Safety Reminders

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle. It only helps with thesteering control during braking.ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly, such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability. Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

232 2009 Fit


If equipped

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does this byregulating the engine's output and byselectively applying the brakes.When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times. There may alsobe some noise from the VSAhydraulic system. You will also seethe VSA system indicator blink.The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle's driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle's entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

VSA Off Indicator

When VSA is off, the VSA offindicator comes on as a reminder.

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA system indicator blink.If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.NOTE: The main function of the VSAsystem is generally known asElectronic Stability Control (ESC).The system also includes a tractioncontrol function.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystem automatically turns on even ifthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage 234). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

CONTINUED

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

233

Driving

2009 Fit


VSA Off Switch

This switch is under the driver's sidebeverage holder. To turn the VSAsystem on and off, press and hold ituntil you hear a beep.When VSA is off, the VSA offindicator comes on as a reminder.Press and hold the switch again. Itturns the system back on.

VSA is turned on every time you startthe engine, even if you turned it offthe last time you drove the vehicle.In certain unusual conditions whenyour vehicle gets stuck in shallowmud or fresh snow, it may be easierto free it with the VSA temporarilyswitched off. When the VSA systemis off, the traction control system isalso off. You should only attempt tofree your vehicle with the VSA off ifyou are not able to free it when theVSA is on.Immediately after freeing yourvehicle, be sure to switch the VSA onagain. We do not recommend drivingyour vehicle with the VSA andtraction control systems switched off.

VSA and Tire SizesDriving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage 277).If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

VSA OFF SWITCH

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

234 2009 Fit


U.S. models onlyYour vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.Each tire has its own pressure sensor(not including the spare tire). If theair pressure of a tire becomessignificantly low, the sensor in thattire immediately sends a signal thatcauses the low tire pressure indicatorto come on.

Low Tire PressureIndicator

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure as indicated onthe vehicle's tire information placard.If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly, and inflate the tire tothe recommended pressure shownon the driver's doorjamb.If the tire is flat, or if the tire pressureis too low to continue driving, replacethe tire with the compact spare tire(see page 284).

If you cannot make the low tirepressure indicator go out afterinflating the tires to the specifiedvalues, have your dealer check thesystem as soon as possible.Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle's handling andstopping ability.Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

CONTINUED

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

235

Driving

2009 Fit


For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.Refer to page 273 for tire inflationguidelines.Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the tireinformation label and in the owner'smanual (see page 274).

Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) Indicator

This indicator comes on and stays onif there is a problem with the tirepressure monitoring system.If this happens, the system will shutoff and no longer monitor tirepressures. Have the system checkedby your dealer as soon as possible.If the low tire pressure indicator orTPMS indicator comes on, the VSAsystemꭧ automatically turns on evenif the VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switchꭧ (seepage 234). If this happens, youcannnot turn the VSA system off bypressig the VSA off switch again.ꭧ: If equipped

When you restart the vehicle withthe compact spare tire, the TPMSindicator may also come on and stayon after driving several miles(kilometers).


236 2009 Fit


Changing a Tire with TPMSIf you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure indicator will come on.Replace the flat tire with the compactspare tire (see page 284).Each wheel (except the compactspare tire wheel) is equipped with atire pressure sensor mounted insidethe tire behind the valve stem. Youmust use TPMS specific wheels. It isrecommended that you always haveyour tires serviced by your dealer orqualified technician.After you replace the flat tire with thecompact spare tire, the low tirepressure indicator stays on. This isnormal; the system is not monitoringthe spare tire pressure. Manuallycheck the spare tire pressure to besure it is correct. After several miles(kilometers) driving with thecompact spare tire, the TPMSindicator comes on and the low tirepressure indicator goes off.

The low tire pressure indicator or theTPMS indicator will go off, afterseveral miles (kilometers) driving,when you replace the spare tire withthe specified regular tire equippedwith the tire pressure monitorsensor.Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

As required by the FCC: This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.




237

Driving

2009 Fit


Towing a TrailerYour vehicle is not designed to tow atrailer. Attempting to do so can voidyour warranties.

Towing Your Vehicle Behind aMotorhomeYour vehicle can be towed behind amotorhome at legal highway speedsup to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do notexceed 65 mph (100 km/h).Otherwise, severe transmissiondamage will occur.When purchasing a tow bar, makesure you select a reputablemanufacturer and installer. Followthe manufacturer's attachmentinstructions carefully.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns freely before you begintowing.

Automatic transmission:Perform the following procedureevery day immediately before youbegin towing. Otherwise severeautomatic transmission damage willoccur.1. Check the transmission fluid level(see page 259). Do not overfill.

2. Start the engine.3. Press on the brake pedal. Movethe shift lever through all itspositions.

4. Shift to the D position and hold for5 seconds, then to N. Let theengine run for 3 minutes, then turnit off.

Severe transmission damage will occurif the vehicle is shifted from reverse toneutral and then towed with the drivewheels on the ground.

Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

238 2009 Fit


5. Release the parking brake.Manual transmission:

1. Move the shifter into the Neutralposition.

2. Release the parking brake.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock. Makesure the radio and any items pluggedinto the accessory power sockets areturned off so you do not run downthe battery.When you stop towing your vehicleand shift out of the neutral position,you may not be able to move the shiftlever from neutral to reverse or Park.If this happens, press the brake pedaland turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, then shift out ofneutral.

Extended TowingIf you tow more than 8 hours in oneday, you should repeat the aboveprocedure at least every 8 hours(when you stop for fuel, etc.)

Failure to follow the recommendedinstructions exactly will result in severeautomatic transmission damage. If youcannot shift the transmission or startthe engine, your vehicle must betransported on a flat-bed truck ortrailer.

When towing your vehicle for longperiods, remove the 20A AccessorySocket and 30A Radio fuses toreduce drain on battery. These fusesare located in the interior fuse boxand are shown as number 13 and 61below.

CONTINUED

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

239

Driving

2009 Fit


Only remove the fuses after you haveperformed the transmission shiftingprocedure, and the key is in theACCESSORY (I) position. Store thefuses in an obvious location (centerpocket, etc) as a reminder to re-install the fuses before driving thevehicle.On vehicles without navigation systemIf the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ ENTER CODE ’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code (see page191).When the audio system is disabled,the clock setting in the audio systemwill be canceled. You will need toreset the clock (see page 192).

On vehicles with navigation systemThe navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter ‘‘ ENTERCODE ’’ before it can be used. Referto the navigation system manual.

ACCESSORY SOCKET FUSE

RADIO FUSE


240 2009 Fit


Automatic transmissionIf you tow a Fit behind a motorhome,the transmission fluid must bechanged every 2 years or 30,000miles (48,000 km), whichever comesfirst.


241

Driving

2009 Fit


242 2009 Fit


This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance minder messages onthe information display, andinstructions for simple maintenancetasks you may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage 335 for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

Maintenance Safety..................... 244Maintenance Minder .................. 245Fluid Locations ........................... 252Adding Engine Oil ...................... 253Changing the Engine Oil and

Filter ....................................... 254Engine Coolant ........................... 256Windshield Washers................... 258Transmission Fluid ..................... 259Automatic Transmission

Fluid ................................... 259Manual Transmission Fluid .... 260

Brake and Clutch Fluid ............... 261Lights.......................................... 262Cleaning the Seat Belts ............... 267Floor Mats .................................. 267Audio Antenna ............................ 268Dust and Pollen Filter ................. 268Wiper Blades .............................. 269Tires ........................................... 273Checking the Battery .................. 279Vehicle Storage........................... 281

Maintenance

243

Maintenance

2009 Fit


All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.Important Safety PrecautionsTo eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.● Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

● To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

● To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

● Wear eye protection and protectiveclothing when working with thebattery or compressed air.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner'smanual.

Potential Vehicle Hazards● Carbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust. Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

● Burns from hot parts. Let theengine and exhaust system cooldown before touching any parts.

● Injury from moving parts. Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner'smanual.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Maintenance Safety

244 2009 Fit


Your vehicle displays engine oil lifeand maintenance service items onthe information display to show youwhen you should have your dealerperform engine oil replacement andindicated maintenance service.Based on the engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life and displays it as apercentage.

Engine Oil Life Display

To see the current engine oil life,turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, then press and releasethe select/reset knob repeatedlyuntil the engine oil life indicatorappears (see page 68).

The remaining engine oil life isshown on the display according tothis table:Calculated Engine

Oil Life (%)Displayed

Engine Oil Life (%)100%－91% 100%90%－81% 90%80%－71% 80%70%－61% 70%60%－51% 60%50%－41% 50%40%－31% 40%30%－21% 30%20%－16% 20%15%－11% 15%10%－6% 10%5%－1% 5%

0% 0%

SELECT/RESET KNOB

ENGINE OIL LIFE INDICATOR

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

245

Maintenance

2009 Fit


If the remaining engine oil life is 15to 6 percent, you will see the engineoil life indicator every time you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position. The maintenance minderindicator will also come on, and themaintenance item code(s) for otherscheduled maintenance itemsneeding service will be displayedabove the ‘‘ OIL LIFE ’’ message.

The 15 and 11 percent oil lifeindicator reminds you that the time iscoming soon to take your vehicle infor the required maintenance.

When the remaining engine oil life is5 to 1 percent, you will see a‘‘ SERVICE ’’ message along with thesame maintenance item code(s),every time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

MAINTENANCEMINDER INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE(S)

ENGINE OIL LIFEINDICATOR

Maintenance Minder

246 2009 Fit


The maintenance item code or codesindicate the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change(see page 248).You can switch the informationdisplay from the engine oil lifedisplay to the odometer or the tripmeter. Press and release the select/reset knob on the instrument panel.When the engine oil life is 15 to 1percent, the maintenance minderindicator ( ) comes on every timeyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position, then it goes out ifyou switch the information display.When you see this message, havethe indicated maintenance performedby your dealer as soon as possible.

When the remaining engine oil life is0 percent, the engine oil life indicatorwill blink. The display comes onevery time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Themaintenance minder indicator ( )also comes on and remains on in theinstrument panel. When you see thismessage, immediately have theindicated maintenance done by yourdealer.

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance, negative mileage isdisplayed and begins to blink afterthe vehicle has been driven 10 miles(10 km) or more.Negative mileage means your vehiclehas passed the maintenance requiredpoint.Immediately have the indicatedmaintenance done by your dealer.

NEGATIVE MILEAGE

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

247

Maintenance

2009 Fit


To change the information displayfrom the engine oil life display to theodometer, the trip meter or averagefuel mileage, press and release theselect/reset knob.When the engine oil life is 0 percentor negative mileage, the maintenanceminder indicator ( ) remains oneven if you change the informationdisplay.Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as described.

Maintenance Main Items and SubItems

All maintenance items displayed onthe information display are in code.For an explanation of thesemaintenance codes, see page 251.

Resetting the Engine Oil LifeDisplayYour dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘ OIL LIFE 100% ’’ on the informationdisplay the next time you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

2. Press the select/reset knobrepeatedly until the engine oil lifeis displayed.

MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM(S)

Maintenance Minder

248 2009 Fit


3. Press the select/reset knob forabout 10 seconds. The engine oillife and the maintenance itemcode(s) will blink.

4. Press the select/reset knob foranother 5 seconds. Themaintenance item code(s) willdisappear, and the engine oil lifewill reset to ‘‘ 100. ’’

Important MaintenancePrecautionsIf you have the required service donebut do not reset the display, or resetthe display without doing the service,the system will not show the propermaintenance intervals. This can leadto serious mechanical problemsbecause you will no longer have anaccurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.Your authorized Honda dealer knowsyour vehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

249

Maintenance

2009 Fit


However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warranties ineffect. Maintenance may be done byany qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Make sure tohave the service facility or personreset the display as previouslydescribed. Keep all receipts as proofof completion, and have the personwho does the work fill out yourHonda Service History or CanadianMaintenance Log. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.We recommend using Honda partsand fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same highquality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

U.S. Vehicles:Maintenance,replacement, or repair ofemissions control devices andsystems may be done by anyautomotive repair establishmentor individual using parts that are‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards.According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith＃will not void your emissionswarranties. However, allmaintenance services should beperformed in accordance with theintervals indicated by the informationdisplay.Owner's Maintenance ChecksYou should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. If youare unsure of how to perform anycheck, turn to the appropriate pagelisted.

● Engine oil level－ Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. See page201.

● Engine coolant level－ Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page 202.

● Automatic transmission－ Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page259.

● Brakes－ Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page 261.

● Tires－ Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page274.

● Lights－ Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page 262.

Maintenance Minder

250 2009 Fit


Symbol Maintenance Main Items

A ● Replace engine oilꭧ1

B ● Replace engine oil and oil filter

● Inspect front and rear brakes

● Check parking brake adjustment

● Inspect these items:

● Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots

● Suspension components

● Driveshaft boots

● Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)

● All fluid levels and condition of fluids

● Exhaust system＃

● Fuel lines and connections＃

ꭧ1: If the message ‘‘ SERVICE ’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the

display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

＃: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 249.

NOTE: ● Independent of maintenance message in the information display, replace

the brake fluid every 3 years.

● Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).

● Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

1 ● Rotate tires

2 ● Replace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000

miles (24,000 km).

● Replace dust and pollen filter

If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high

concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from

diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles

(24,000 km).

● Inspect drive belt

3 ● Replace transmission fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle

speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.

This requires transmission fluid changes more

frequently than recommended by the maintenance

minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these

conditions, have the transmission fluid changed at

60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles

(48,000 km). (For A/T only)

If you tow a FIT behind a motorhome, the transmission

fluid must be changed every 2 years or 30,000 miles

(48,000 km), whichever comes first. (For A/T only)

4 ● Replace spark plugs

● Inspect valve clearance

5 ● Replace engine coolant

Maintenance MinderMaintenance

Minder

251 2009 Fit


CLUTCH FLUID(ManualTransmission only)(Gray cap)

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK (Yellow loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

Fluid Locations

252 2009 Fit


Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on the valve cover. Pour in theoil slowly and carefully so you do notspill any. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level onthe engine oil dipstick. Do not fillabove the upper mark; you coulddamage the engine.

Recommended Engine OilOil is a major contributor to yourengine's performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute's latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘ For Gasoline Engines. ’’The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container's label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

ENGINE OIL FILL CAPAPI CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Oil

253

Maintenance

2009 Fit


Synthetic OilYou may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil, itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the informationdisplay.Engine Oil AdditivesYour vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Changing the Engine Oil andFilterAlways change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the informationdisplay. The oil and filter collectcontaminants that can damage yourengine if they are not removedregularly.Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

1. Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

2. Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

WASHER

OIL DRAIN BOLT

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

254 2009 Fit


3. Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.Make sure the oil filter gasket isnot stuck to the engine block. If itis, remove it before installing anew oil filter.

4. Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.Make sure to clean off any dirt anddust on the connecting surface of anew oil filter.

5. Put a new washer on the drainbolt, then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:29 lbf·ft (39 N·m, 4.0 kgf·m)

6. Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):3.8 US qt (3.6 L)

7. Replace the engine oil fill cap. Startthe engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

8. Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

9. Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmful to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

OIL FILTER

Changing the Engine Oil and Filter

255

Maintenance

2009 Fit


Adding Engine Coolant

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAXline. Inspect the cooling system forleaks.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze or plainwater.If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminumengines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result incorrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

RESERVE TANK

Engine Coolant

256 2009 Fit


1. Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

2. Relieve any pressure in the coolingsystem by turning the radiator capcounterclockwise, withoutpressing down.

3. Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

4. The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill any.Clean up any spill immediately; itcould damage components in theengine compartment.

5. Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle'scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANK

Engine Coolant

257

Maintenance

2009 Fit


Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use. Thisreservoir supplies the windshield andrear window washers.

On U.S. models: To check thewindshield washer fluid level, openthe hood and look the windshieldwasher reservoir located behind theright headlight. You will see a ‘‘ 1/2 ’’mark on the reservoir.

On Canadian models: The low washerlevel indicator comes on when thelevel is low (see page 65).Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Do not use engine antifreeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antifreezecan damage your vehicle's paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher fluid.

WINDSHIELD WASHER RESERVOIR

Fill up to here

Windshield Washers

258 2009 Fit


Automatic Transmission Fluid

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.1. Park the vehicle on level ground.Start the engine, let it run until theradiator fan comes on, then shutoff the engine. For accurateresults, wait about 60 seconds (butno longer than 90 seconds) beforedoing step 2.

2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

3. Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

4. Remove the dipstick, and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

5. If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipstickhole to bring it to the levelbetween the upper and lowermarks.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid).

DIPSTICK

UPPERMARKLOWERMARK

HOTMARK

CONTINUED

Transmission Fluid

259

Maintenance

2009 Fit


Use only Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Do notmix with other transmission fluids.Using transmission fluid other thanHonda Genuine ATF-Z1 may causedeterioration in transmission operationand durability, and could result indamage to the transmission.Damage resulting from the use oftransmission fluid other than HondaGenuine ATF-Z1 is not covered by theHonda new vehicle warranty.

6. Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Manual Transmission Fluid

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle on levelground.Remove the transmission filler bolt,and carefully feel inside the bolt holewith your finger. The fluid levelshould be up to the edge of the bolthole. If it is not, add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the hole.

Put a new washer on the filler bolt,then reinstall the filler bolt andtighten it securely.If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘ FORGASOLINE ENGINES ’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace as soonas it is convenient.If you are not sure how to check andadd fluid, contact your dealer.

FILLER BOLT

Correct level WASHER

Transmission Fluid

260 2009 Fit


Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.There are up to two reservoirs,depending on the model. They are:● Brake fluid reservoir (all models)● Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission modelsonly)

Replace the brake fluid according tothe time recommendation in themaintenance minder schedule.Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle'sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Brake Fluid

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads/shoes.

MAX MIN

CONTINUED

Brake and Clutch Fluid

261

Maintenance

2009 Fit


Clutch FluidManual Transmission only

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, add brakefluid to bring it up to that level. Usethe same fluid specified for the brakesystem.A low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Headlight AimingThe headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area, readjustment may berequired. Adjustments should bedone by your dealer or anotherqualified mechanic.Replacing a Headlight BulbYour vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its base, and protect the glassfrom contact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

1. Open the hood.2. Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

3. Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

MAX

MIN

BULBELECTRICALCONNECTOR

RUBBER WEATHER SEAL

HOLD-DOWNWIRE

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Lights

262 2009 Fit


4. Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot the wireout of the way, then remove thebulb.

5. Install the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place, and clip the end intothe slot.

6. Make sure that the hold-down wireis installed properly and securely.You can check its installation fromthe inspection window on theheadlight assembly.

7. Install the rubber seal over theback of the headlight assembly.

8. Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Make sure it isconnected securely. Turn on theheadlights to test the new bulb.

Replacing a Parking Light/FrontSide Marker Bulb

1. Open the hood.2. Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

3. Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

4. Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

INSPECTION WINDOW

HOLD-DOWNWIRE

CONTINUED

Lights

263

Maintenance

2009 Fit


5. Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Replacing a Front Turn SignalLight Bulb

1. Open the hood.2. Remove the socket by turning it

one-quarter turn counterclockwise.3. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pushing the bulb in and turningit counterclockwise until it unlocks.

4. Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.


6. Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

Lights

264 2009 Fit


Replacing a Fog Light BulbOn Sport modelThe fog lights use halogen bulbs.When replacing a bulb, handle itcarefully. See page 262 for moreinformation.

1. Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the screw.

2. To remove the fog light assembly,pull it out of the bumper.

3. Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

4. Remove the bulb by turning itabout one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

5. Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

6. Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

7. Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

8. Reinstall the fog light assembly,then tighten the screw.

SCREW

ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR

CONTINUED

Lights

265

Maintenance

2009 Fit


Replacing Rear Bulbs

1. Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the light assemblycover. Remove the cover bycarefully prying in the notch on itsmiddle edge with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

2. Determine which of the threebulbs is burned out: stop/taillight,back-up light, or turn signal light.

3. Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

4. Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pulling it straight outof its socket.

5. Install the new bulb in the socket.6. Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.


8. Reinstall the light assembly cover.LIGHT ASSEMBLY COVER

Lights

266 2009 Fit


Cleaning the Seat Belts

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Floor Mats(Optional)

The driver's floor mat that came withyour vehicle hooks over the floor matanchors. To lock each hook, turn theknob clockwise. This keeps the floormat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals.When cleaning or replacing, turn theknob counterclockwise to unhookthe floor mat.

LOOP

UnlockLock

KNOB

CONTINUED

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

267

Maintenance

2009 Fit


If you remove the driver's floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.If you use a non-Honda floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be anchored securely. Donot put additional floor mats on top ofthe anchored mat.

Audio Antenna

Your vehicle is equipped with anantenna at the rear of the roof. Beforeusing a ‘‘ drive-through ’’ car wash,remove the antenna by unscrewing it byhand. This prevents the antenna frombeing damaged by the car washbrushes.

Dust and Pollen FilterOn models with A/CThis filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system.Have your dealer replace the filterwhen this service is indicated by amaintenance message on theinformation display. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air, or if the flow fromthe heating and cooling systembecomes less than usual.

Floor Mats, Audio Antenna, Dust and Pollen Filter

268 2009 Fit


Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

To replace a front wiper blade:1. Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield. Raise the driver's sidefirst, then the passenger's side.

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

2. Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm:● Put a cloth on the edge of thelock tab, then push up on thelock tab carefully with a flat-tipscrewdriver.

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

269

Maintenance

2009 Fit


● Pivot the blade assembly towardthe wiper arm until it releasesfrom the wiper arm.

When replacing a wiper blade,make sure not to drop the wiperblade or wiper arm down on thewindshield.

3. Remove the blade from its holderby grabbing the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

4. Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them in theslots along the edge of the newblade.

Make sure the two rubber tabsinside the blade fit to each notch ofthe reinforcement, as shown.

WIPER ARM BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

TOPBLADE

Wiper Blades

270 2009 Fit


5. Place the top of the wiper blade onthe end of the blade assembly, andslide the blade onto the assembly.Make sure the blade is completelyinstalled.

6. Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Push down thelock tab. Make sure the wiperblade assembly locks in place.

7. Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield, the passenger'sside first, then the driver's side.

To replace the rear wiper blade:1. Raise the wiper arm off the rearwindow.

2. Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pivoting theblade assembly upward.

CONTINUED

Wiper Blades

271

Maintenance

2009 Fit


3. Slide the blade out of the holder. 4. Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them in theslots along the edge of the newblade.

5. Slide the new blade into theholder. Make sure it is engaged inthe slot along its full length.Insert both ends of the blade intothe holder. Make sure they aresecure.

6. Install the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

7. Lower the wiper arm against thewindshield.

BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

Wiper Blades

272 2009 Fit


To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner's manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Inflation GuidelinesKeeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.● Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

● Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS)ꭧ warns you when a tirepressure is low. See page 235 formore information.ꭧ: If equipped

Even though your vehicle isequipped with TPMS, werecommend that you visually checkyour tires every day. If you think atire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire (if equipped) at the sametime.Check the air pressures when thetires are cold. This means the vehiclehas been parked for at least 3 hours,or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures.

CONTINUED

Tires

273

Maintenance

2009 Fit


If you check air pressures when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4kgf/cm2) higher than the coldreadings. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the recommendedcold air pressure. The tire will beunderinflated.You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Recommended Tire PressuresThe following charts show therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal and high-speed drivingconditions.All models except Sport

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

175/65R15 84S Front/Rear:

32 psi (220 kPa,2.2 kgf/cm2)

Sport modelTire Size Cold Tire Pressure

for Normal Driving

185/55R16 83H Front/Rear:

33 psi (230 kPa,2.3 kgf/cm2)

If equippedThe compact spare tire pressure is:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver's doorjamb.For additional information about yourtires, see page 323.

Tires

274 2009 Fit


Tire InspectionEvery time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:● Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

● Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side ofthe tire. Replace the tire if you cansee fabric or cord.

● Excessive tread wear.Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see a 1/2inch (12.7 mm) wide band across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire.A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

Tire Service LifeThe service life of your tires isdependent on many factors,including, but not limited to, drivinghabits, road conditions, vehicleloading, inflation pressure,maintenance history, speed, andenvironmental conditions (evenwhen the tires are not in use).

In addition to your regularinspections and inflation pressuremaintenance, it is recommended thatyou have annual inspectionsperformed once the tires reach fiveyears old. It is also recommendedthat all tires, including the spare, beremoved from service after 10 yearsfrom the date of manufacture,regardless of their condition or stateof wear.The last four digits of the TIN (tireidentification number) are found onthe sidewall of the tire and indicatethe date of manufacture (See TireLabeling on page 323).

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

CONTINUED

Tires

275

Maintenance

2009 Fit


Tire MaintenanceIn addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decreasetire wear. If you find a tire is wornunevenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignment.Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

On vehicles with aluminum wheels,improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle's aluminum wheels. Useonly Honda wheel weights forbalancing.

Tire Rotation

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires according to themaintenance messages displayed onthe information display. Move thetires to the positions shown in theillustration each time they arerotated. If you purchase directionaltires, rotate only front-to-back.When the tires are rotated, makesure the air pressures are checked.

Replacing Tires and WheelsReplace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire's sidewall).Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA)ꭧ to workinconsistently.The ABS and VSA systemꭧ work bycomparing the speed of the wheels.When replacing tires, use the samesize originally supplied with thevehicle. Tire size and constructioncan affect wheel speed and maycause the system to activate.ꭧ: If equipped

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Tires

276 2009 Fit


It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle's handling.If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel's specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.Also be sure you use only TPMSspecific wheels (if equipped). If youdo not, the tire pressure monitoringsystem will not work.Replacement wheels are available atyour dealer.

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner's manual.

Wheel and Tire SpecificationsWheels:

All models except Sport15 x 5 1/2JSport model16 x 6J

Tires:All models except Sport175/65R15 84SSport model185/55R16 83H

See page 321 for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page 323for tire size and labeling information.

CONTINUED

Tires

277

Maintenance

2009 Fit


Winter DrivingTires marked ‘‘ M＋ S ’’ or ‘‘ AllSeason ’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.Snow TiresIf you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Tire ChainsMount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions or locallaws. Install them only on the fronttires.Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

All models except SportSC1026

Sport modelSC1030

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer's instructions, andmount them as tight as you can. Makesure they are not contacting the brakelines or suspension. Drive slowly withthem installed. If you hear themcoming into contact with the body orchassis, stop and investigate. Removethem as soon as you begin driving oncleared roads.

Traction devices that are the wrong sizeor improperly installed can damageyour vehicle's brake lines, suspension,body, and wheels. Stop driving if theyare hitting any part of the vehicle.

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner's manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Tires

278 2009 Fit


WheelsClean the wheels as you would therest of the exterior. Wash them withthe same solution, and rinse themthoroughly.If equippedAluminum alloy wheels have aprotective clear-coat that keeps thealuminum from corroding andtarnishing. Cleaning the wheels withharsh chemicals (including somecommercial wheel cleaners) or a stiffbrush can damage the clear-coat. Toclean the wheels, use a milddetergent and a soft brush or sponge.

Checking the Battery

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator'scolors.The location of the test indicatorwindow varies betweenmanufacturers.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with a clothor paper towel. Coat the terminalswith grease to help prevent futurecorrosion.If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

CONTINUED

Tires, Checking the Battery

279

Maintenance

2009 Fit


WARNING: Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.Wash your hands after handling.If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle'selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative (－) cable first, andreconnect it last.On vehicles without navigation systemIf your vehicle's battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, the timesetting is lost. To reset the time, seepage 192.If your vehicle's battery isdisconnected, or goes dead, theaudio system may disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio, youwill see ‘‘ ENTER CODE ’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code (see page191).

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurtyou.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledtechnician do the batterymaintenance.

On vehicles with navigation systemThe navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter ‘‘ ENTERCODE ’’ before it can be used. Referto the navigation system manual.

Checking the Battery

280 2009 Fit


If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.● Fill the fuel tank.● Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

● Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

● Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in reverse(manual) or Park (automatic).

● Block the rear wheels.

● If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

● Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

● Disconnect the battery.● Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

● To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

● Cover the vehicle with a‘‘ breathable ’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

● If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (the coolingfans cycle on and off twice).Preferably, do this once a month.

Vehicle Storage

281

Maintenance

2009 Fit


282 2009 Fit


This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again. Ifnot, you will also find instructions ongetting your vehicle towed.

Compact Spare Tire .................... 284Changing a Flat Tire ................... 285Temporarily Repairing a Flat

Tire ......................................... 291If the Engine Won't Start............. 297Jump Starting.............................. 299If the Engine Overheats .............. 301Low Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 303Charging System Indicator ......... 303Malfunction Indicator Lamp........ 304Brake System Indicator............... 305Fuses .......................................... 306Fuse Locations............................ 309Emergency Towing..................... 311If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck .......... 312

Taking Care of the Unexpected

283

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


Except all Canadian models withautomatic transmissionUse the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired orreplaced, and put it back on yourvehicle as soon as you can.Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

Follow these precautions:● Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).● This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some roadsurfaces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

● Do not mount tire chains on thecompact spare tire.

● Do not use your compact spare tireon another vehicle unless it is thesame make and model.

● On vehicles with the TPMSsystem, the low tire pressureindicator comes on and stays onafter you replace the flat tire withthe compact spare tire. Afterseveral miles (kilometers) drivingwith the compact spare tire, theTPMS indicator comes on and thelow tire pressure indicator goesoff.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

Compact Spare Tire

284 2009 Fit


Except all Canadian models withautomatic transmissionIf you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

3. Lift the rear center head restraint.

4. Open the tailgate. Raise the cargoarea floor lid by lifting it up withthe back of the strap. To keep thefloor lid open, hook the loopedside of the strap to the legs of therear center head restraint.

5. Take the tool kit out of the sparetire.

FLOOR LID LOOP

SPARETIRE

TOOL KIT JACK STRAP

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

285

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


6. Take the jack out of the cargo area.Turn the jack's end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack by lifting itstraight up.

7. Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

8. On all models except Sport andCanadian LX model with manualtransmission, remove the wheelcover by carefully prying under itsedge with the flat tip of theextension.

9. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

EXTENSION WHEEL NUT

WHEEL COVER WHEEL NUT WRENCH


286 2009 Fit


10. Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. It is pointed to by a △mark molded into the underside ofthe body (Sport model). Turn theend bracket clockwise until the topof the jack contacts the jackingpoint. Make sure the jacking pointtab is resting in the jack notch.

11. Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

12. Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Handle thewheel nuts carefully; they may behot from driving. Place the flat tireon the ground with the outsidesurface facing up.

13. Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

JACKING POINT

EXTENSION

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

BRAKE HUB

CONTINUED


287

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


14. Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly against thehub. Do not try to tighten thewheel nuts fully.

15. Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

16. Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:80 lbf·ft (108 N·m, 11 kgf·m)

17. On Sport model and Canadian LXmodel with manual transmission:Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire.

18. Remove the strap loop from thelegs of the head restraint andlower the cargo area floor lid.

19. Pull the floor lid toward you andremove the tabs.

20. Pull the floor lid out.

TAB

FLOOR LID


288 2009 Fit


21. Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

22. Secure the flat tire by screwing thewing bolt back into its hole.

23. Store the jack. Place the tool kit inthe center of the flat tire.

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

24. Place the floor lid in the cargoarea.

25. Store the wheel cover or centercap in the cargo area. Make surewill not get scratched or damaged.

26. Close the tailgate.27. On U.S. models

Your vehicle's original tire has atire pressure monitoring systemsensor. To replace a tire, refre toChanging a Tire with TPMS (seepage 237).

Fornomaltire

Forsparetire

CONTINUED


289

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


Installing a wheel cover

All models except Sport and CanadianLX model with manual transmission

1. Make sure the wire support ring ishooked into the clips around theedge of the wheel cover.

2. Align the valve mark on the wheelcover to the tire valve on thewheel, then install the wheelcover.

3. Make sure the wire support ring ison the outer side of the tire valveas shown.

CLIPS CLIPS

WIRE SUPPORT RING


290 2009 Fit


How to Use the Tire Repair KitAll Canadian models with automatictransmissionTo reduce weight, your vehicle isequipped with a tire repair kit insteadof a spare tire. This kit will allow youto temporarily repair a flat tire underthe following conditions:● Only one tire is flat.● The puncture is smaller than 3/16ths of an inch (4 mm).

● The puncture is located within thetread.

● The wheel rim is not damaged.● The tire bead is seated.When making a temporary repair,carefully follow all instructions in thisowner's manual and in theinstructions that came with the kit.

If you have a flat tire while driving,park the vehicle on a level surface ina safe place, put the transmission inPark (P), set the parking brake, andturn the hazard lights on.Thoroughly examine the tire for apuncture or other damage.If a puncture is wider than 3/16ths ofan inch (4 mm), or is located in thetire sidewall, do not attempt to repairthe tire. Have your vehicle towed to aHonda service center. In Canada orthe continental U.S.A. simply call 1-800-465-PLUS (7587) for Honda PlusRoadside Assistance.If the damage is smaller than 3/16thsof an inch (4 mm) and within the tiretread, proceed with the followinginstructions.

1. Park vehicle on a level surface in asafe place. Set shifter lever intoPARK and engage the parkingbrake. Turn hazard light on.Remove valve cap from tire valve.

TIRE VALVE

VALVE CAP

CONTINUED

Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire

291

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


2. Lift the rear center head restraint.3. Open the tailgate. Raise the cargo

area floor lid by lifting it up with theback of the strap. To keep the floorlid open, hook the looped side ofthe strap to the legs of the rearcenter head restraint.

Your tire repair kit contains:● An air pump with a power cord andan air hose attached.

● A bottle of sealant with a filler hoseattached.

● Two labels, one for the tire wheeland one for the instrument panel.

● An instruction sheet.

● An empty recovery bottle. A tirerepair professional will use this tocollect the injected sealant from thetire during the permanent repair.

4. Remove the sealant bottle andcheck the expiration date on thelabel. If the date has expired, do notcontinue. Have your vehicle towedto the nearest Honda servicecenter. In Canada or thecontinental U.S.A. simply call 1-800-465-PLUS (7587) for Honda PlusRoadside Assistance.

FLOOR LID LOOP

TIRE REPAIR KIT STRAP

EXPIRATION DATE


292 2009 Fit


If the date has not expired, shakethe bottle thoroughly and proceedto step 5.

5. Screw the sealant filler hose ontothe tire valve. Make sure the bottleremains upright to ensure all of thesealant flows into the tire.

6. Unscrew the bottle cap from thebottle adapter.

7. Remove the air pump from therepair kit, then screw the air pumphose onto the bottle adapter tightly.

8. Route the power cord into thevehicle, and insert the plug into theaccessory power socket.Pay attention not to have the powercord pinched by the door.

9. Turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) position.

BOTTLE HOSE

TIRE VALVE

AIR PUMP HOSE

AIR PUMP BOTTLE CAP ADAPTER

BOTTLECAP

PLUG

ACCESSORY SOCKET

CONTINUED


293

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


In freezing temperatures, turn theengine on and leave it runningwhile the flat tire is being serviced.Prolonged exposure to the coldmay cause the vehicle's battery toweaken. Under cold conditions,safely start the vehicle's engine andkeep the engine running at idlewhen operating the air pump.

Running the engine with thevehicle in an enclosed or evenpartly enclosed area can causea rapid build-up of toxic carbonmonoxide.Breathing this colorless,odorless gas can causeunconsciousness and evendeath. Only run the engine topower the air pump with thevehicle outdoors.

10. Turn the air pump on to inflate thetire. Do not run the air pump formore than 15 minutes or it mayoverheat. The air pressure gaugewill show about 40 to 60 psi (275 to415 kPa) for the first few minuteswhile the sealant is pumped intothe tire, and then the pressure willgo down to about 10 to 20 psi (70to 140 kPa).

11. Inflate the tire to 33 psi (230 kPa),then turn the air pump switch OFFfor an accurate pressure reading. Ifthe pressure fails to reach 33 psi(230 kPa) within 15 minutes, donot continue, and have the vehicletowed. In Canada or thecontinental U.S.A. simply call 1-800-465-PLUS (7587) for HondaPlus Roadside Assistance.


13. Remove the sealant bottle hosefrom the tire valve, then reinstallthe tire valve cap.

AIR PUMP SWITCH

OFF

ON


294 2009 Fit


14. Push the deflate button on the airpump until the air pressure gaugeshows 0 psi.

15. Remove the wheel label from therepair kit, wipe any dirt off thewheel with a clean cloth, andattach the label to the center of thewheel.The label may adhere poorly whencold. Clean the surface andsecurely attach the label.

16. Remove the front pillar label fromthe repair kit and place it as shownabove.

17. Remove the power plug from theaccessory power socket.

18. Return all items except the airpump to the repair kit, and storethe kit in the cargo floor box. Keepthe air pump handy as you mayneed it soon.

AIR PRESSURE GAUGE

DEFLATE BUTTON

WHEEL LABEL

LABEL

CONTINUED


295

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


19. Drive carefully within the speed of50 mph (80 km/h) for 5 minutes.

20. Stop safely and check the pressurein the tire. Remove the tire valvecap, screw the air pump hose ontothe tire valve, and check the airgauge. (You do not need to attachthe power cord or turn the airpump switch on.)

If pressure is less than 19 psi (130kPa), do not drive the vehiclefurther or attempt to re-inflate thetire. Call or wait for help. Ifpressure is lower than 33 psi (230kPa) and higher than 19 psi (130kPa), use air pump to bring tirepressure to 33 psi (230 kPa).

21. Then, drive carefully within thespeed of 50 mph (80 km/h) for 5minutes more.

22. Stop safely and check the pressurein the tire.

VALVE CAP TIRE VALVE

AIR PUMP HOSE


296 2009 Fit


If the pressure is lower than 32 psi(220 kPa) and higher than 19 psi(130 kPa), use the air pump tobring air to the desired level asdescribed in step 11. Then drive tothe nearest service station at nomore than 50 mph (80 km/h).If the pressure is below 19 psi, donot continue. Have the vehicletowed (see page 311).

In any case, be sure to have thedamaged tire permanently repairedas soon as possible.Remember to return the tire sealantbottle to your Honda service centerfor proper disposal.

If the Engine Won't StartDiagnosing why the engine won'tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:● You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine's startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

● You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very SlowlyWhen you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound, a series of clicks, ornothing at all.Check these things:● Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or neutral.

● Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. SeeJump Starting on page 299.

CONTINUED

Temporarily Repairing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won't Start

297

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


● Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. SeeEmergency Towing on page 311.

If the headlights dim noticeably or goout when you try to start the engine,either the battery is discharged orthe connections are corroded. Checkthe condition of the battery andterminal connections (see page 279).You can then try jump starting thevehicle from a booster battery (seepage 299).

The Starter Operates NormallyIn this case, the starter motor's speedsounds normal, or even faster thannormal, when you turn the ignitionswitch to the START (III) position,but the engine does not run.● Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page 79).

● Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to Starting theEngine on page 216.

● Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

● There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses (seepage 306).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to find theproblem. See Emergency Towing onpage 311.

If the Engine Won't Start

298 2009 Fit


Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correctprocedure, seriously injuringanyone nearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

You cannot start your vehicle with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

1. Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can freeze. Attemptingto jump start with a frozen battery cancause it to rupture.

2. Turn off all the electricalaccessories: heater, A/C (ifequipped), audio system, lights,etc. Put the transmission in neutral(manual) or Park (automatic), andset the parking brake.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

BOOSTER BATTERY

CONTINUED

Jump Starting

299

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


3. Remove the cover from the under-hood fuse box (see page 306).Connect one jumper cable to thepositive (＋) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive (＋) terminal on thebooster battery.

4. Connect the second jumper cableto the negative (－) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the ground strap asshown. Do not connect this jumpercable to any other part of theengine.

5. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant start thatvehicle and run it at a fast idle.

6. Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

7. Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Jump Starting

300 2009 Fit


The high temperature indicatorshould be off under most conditions.If the engine coolant temperaturegets higher than normal, theindicator will blink. If it stays on, youshould determine the reason (hotday, driving up a steep hill, etc.).If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the hightemperature indicator blinking orremaining on. Or you may see steamor spray coming from under thehood.

Driving with the high temperatureindicator on can cause serious damageto your engine.

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

1. Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in neutral(manual) or Park (automatic), andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning lights.

2. If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

3. If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andcheck the high temperatureindicator. If the high heat is due tooverloading, the engine shouldstart to cool down almostimmediately. If it does, wait untilthe high temperature indicatorgoes off, then continue driving.

4. If the high temperature indicatorstays on, turn off the engine.

CONTINUED

If the Engine Overheats

301

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


5. Look for any obvious coolantleaks, such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see EmergencyTowing on page 311).

6. If you don't find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

7. If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the hightemperature indicator goes offbefore checking the radiator.

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

8. Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

9. Start the engine, and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum heat. Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have the propercoolant mixture available, you canadd plain water. Remember tohave the cooling system drainedand refilled with the propermixture as soon as you can.

10. Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and checkthe high temperature indicator. Ifit begins to blink or comes onagain, the engine needs repair (seeEmergency Towing on page 311).

11. If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it has gonedown, add coolant to the MAXmark. Put the cap back on tightly.

If the Engine Overheats

302 2009 Fit


Low Oil Pressure IndicatorThis indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, the oil pressure has dropped verylow or lost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible, and you shouldtake immediate action.

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn offthe engine as soon as you can safely getthe vehicle stopped.

1. Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning lights.

2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page 201). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

3. If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page 253).

4. Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see Emergency Towing on page311).

Charging System IndicatorIf the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, thebattery is not being charged.Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

303

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


If this indicator comes onwhile driving, it means one

of the engine's emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle's performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘ CHECK FUEL CAP ’’ message onthe information display. Tighten thecap until it clicks at least once.Tightening the cap will not turn theindicator off immediately; it can takeseveral days of normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may go off as youcontinue driving, have your vehiclechecked by a dealer as soon aspossible.

If you keep driving with the malfunctionindicator lamp on, you can damageyour vehicle's emissions controls andengine. Those repairs may not becovered by your vehicle's warranties.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the malfunctionindicator lamp may also come onwith the ‘‘ D ’’ indicator.

Readiness CodesYour vehicle has certain ‘‘ readinesscodes ’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.If the battery in your vehicle hasbeen disconnected or gone dead,these codes are erased. It can takeseveral days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for an emissionstest until the readiness codes are set.Refer to Emissions Testing formore information (see page 329).

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

304 2009 Fit


U.S. Canada

Brake SystemIndicator (Red)

The brake system indicator (red)normally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position, and as a reminder to checkthe parking brake. It will stay on ifyou do not fully release the parkingbrake.If the brake system indicator (red)comes on while driving, the brakefluid level is probably low. Presslightly on the brake pedal to see if itfeels normal. If it does, check thebrake fluid level the next time youstop at a service station (see page261).If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads/shoes.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system's dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see EmergencyTowing on page 311).If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator (if equipped) comeon with the brake system indicator,have your vehicle inspected by yourdealer immediately.

Brake System Indicator

305

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


The vehicle's fuses are contained intwo fuse boxes.The interior fuse box is behind thefuse lid. To access it, pull the fuse lidtoward you.

The under-hood fuse box is on thepositive terminal of the battery.

INTERIOR

FUSE LID FUSE LABEL

INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD (On Battery)

Fuses

306 2009 Fit


Checking and Replacing FusesIf something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, check for ablown fuse first. Determine from thechart on pages 309 and 310, or thediagram on the fuse label, which fuseor fuses control that device. Checkthose fuses first, but check all thefuses before deciding that a blownfuse is the cause. Replace any blownfuses, and check if the device works.1. Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.

2. On the under-hood fuse box,remove the cover from the fusebox. On the interior fuse box, pullthe fuse lid toward you.

3. Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box and theinterior fuse box by lookingthrough the top at the wire inside.

4. Check all smaller fuses in theinterior fuse box by pulling outeach one with the fuse pullerprovided in the interior fuse box.

FUSE

BLOWNFUSE PULLER

CONTINUED

Fuses

307

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


5. Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

Replacing a fuse with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement fuse with the proper ratingfor the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

6. If the replacement fuse of the samerating blows in a short time, thereis probably a serious electricalproblem in your vehicle. Leave theblown fuse in that circuit and haveyour vehicle checked by aqualified technician.

On vehicles without navigation systemIf the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ ENTER CODE ’’ in thefrequency display. Use the presetbuttons to enter the code (see page191).When the audio system is disabled,the clock setting in the audio systemwill be canceled. You will need toreset the clock (see page 192).On vehicles with navigation systemThe navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter ‘‘ ENTERCODE ’’ before it can be used. Referto the navigation system manual.

BLOWN

Fuses

308 2009 Fit


INTERIOR FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected1 10 A Back Up2 (7.5 A) TPMSꭧ

3 20 A Driver's Power Window4 － Not Used5 10 A Back Up Light6 10 A SRS7 (10 A) Transmission SOLꭧ

8 7.5 A SRS9 (20 A) Fog Lightꭧ

10 7.5 A A/Cꭧ

11 7.5 A ABS/VSAꭧ

12 10 A ACG13 20 A ACC Socket14 7.5 A Key Lock/Radio15 7.5 A Daytime Running Light16 10 A Rear Wiper17 20 A Front Passenger's Power

Window18 20 A Rear Passenger's Side

Power Window19 20 A Rear Driver's Side Power

Window20 15 A Fuel Pump21 15 A Washer22 7.5 A Meter23 10 A Hazard24 10 A Stop/Horn25 － Not Used

No. Amps. Circuits Protected26 10 A LAF27 (30 A) Door Lock Mainꭧ

28 20 A Headlight Main29 10 A Small Light30 30 A Main Fan Motor31 － Not Used32 10 A Right Headlight Low Beam33 15 A IG Coil34 10 A Left Headlight Low Beam35 (15 A) Door Lockꭧ

36 (15 A) Door Lockꭧ

37 30 A ABS/VSAꭧ FSR38 (15 A) Door Lockꭧ

39 15 A IGP40 － Not Used41 － Not Used42 － Not Used43 (7.5 A) MG Clutch44 7.5 A STS45 － Not Used46 － Not Used47 (30 A) Sub Fan Motor48 10 A Left Headlight High Beam49 (15 A) Door Lockꭧ

50 (15 A) Door Lockꭧ

ꭧ: If equipped

CONTINUED

Fuse Locations

309

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


No. Amps. Circuits Protected51 10 A Right Headlight High Beam52 15 A DBW53 － Not Used54 20 A Rear Defoggerꭧ

55 10 A Heated Mirrorꭧ

56 30 A Front Wiper57 30 A Blower Motor58 30 A ABS/VSAꭧ Motor59 20 A Rear Defogger

30 A60 50 A/

40 AIG Main/Option Main

61 30 A Radio62 － Not Used

ꭧ: If equipped

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX Under-hood Fuse Box (On the battery)

Amps. Circuits Protected100 A Battery70 A EPS20 A Horn/Hazard

Fuse Locations

310 2009 Fit


If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.There are two ways to tow yourvehicle:Flat-bed Equipment － The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck. This is the best way totransport your vehicle.Wheel-lift Equipment － The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the front tires and lift them offthe ground. The rear tires remain onthe ground. This is an acceptableway to tow your vehicle.

If, due to damage, your vehicle mustbe towed with the front wheels onthe ground, do this:Manual transmission:● Release the parking brake.● Shift the transmission to neutral.● Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Automatic transmission:● Release the parking brake.● Start the engine.● Shift to D position and hold for 5seconds, then to N. Let the enginerun for 3 minutes, then turn it off.

● Turn off the engine.● Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position so thesteering wheel does not lock.

Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshift the transmission or start theengine (automatic transmission), yourvehicle must be transported with thefront wheels off the ground.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

CONTINUED

Emergency Towing

311

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle's weight.

The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)position, and make sure the steeringwheel turns freely before you begintowing.

If Your Vehicle Gets StuckIf your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing service topull it out (see page 311).For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can use thedetachable towing hook that mountson the anchor in the front bumper.

To use the towing hook:1. Take the towing hook and theextension out of the tool kit in thecargo area.

2. Put a cloth on the notch of thecover. Using the extension,carefully pry on the notch of thecover to remove it.

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

312 2009 Fit


3. Screw the towing hook into thebolt hole behind the bumper, thentighten the hook securely with theextension.

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe towing hook for straight, flatground towing only. Do not tow at anangle. The tow hook should not be usedto tow the vehicle onto a flat bed. Donot use it as a tie down.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

313

TakingCare

ofthe

Unexpected

2009 Fit


314 2009 Fit


The diagrams in this section give youthe dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle's tires andemissions control systems.

Identification Numbers ............... 316Specifications .............................. 318DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S.

Vehicles) ............................. 321Uniform Tire Quality

Grading............................... 321Treadwear............................... 321Traction .................................. 321Temperature ........................... 322

Tire Labeling .............................. 323Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)－ Required FederalExplanation ......................... 324

Emissions Controls ..................... 326The Clean Air Act.................... 326Crankcase Emissions Control

System................................ 326Evaporative Emissions Control

System................................ 326Onboard Refueling Vapor

Recovery ............................. 326Exhaust Emissions Controls ... 327Replacement Parts .................. 327

Three Way CatalyticConverter................................ 328

Emissions Testing....................... 329

Technical Information

315

TechnicalInformation

2009 Fit


Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver's side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver's doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.The VIN is also located on theengine bulkhead. Slide the cover onthe engine compartment bulkhead toview the VIN. Always close the coverwhen finished.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

COVER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

Identification Numbers

316 2009 Fit


The engine number is stamped intothe front of the engine block.The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

ENGINE NUMBER

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

Identification Numbers

317


2009 Fit


Dimensions

Length 161.6 in (4,105 mm)

Width 66.7 in (1,695 mm)

Height 60.0 in (1,525 mm)

Wheelbase 98.4 in (2,500 mm)

Track Front 58.7 in (1,492 mm)ꭧ1

58.1 in (1,476 mm)ꭧ2

Rear 58.1 in (1,475mm)ꭧ1

57.4 in (1,459 mm)ꭧ2

ꭧ1: All models except Sport

ꭧ2: Sport model

Weights

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attached

to the driver's doorjamb.

Seating Capacities

Total 5

Front 2

Rear 3

Engine

Type Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC

i-VTEC 4-cylinder gasoline engine

Bore x Stroke 2.87 x 3.52 in

(73.0 x 89.4 mm)

Displacement 91.3 cu-in (1,497 cm3)

Compression ratio 10.4 : 1

Spark plugs IZFR6K13 (NGK)

SKJ20DR-M13 (DENSO)

Specifications

318 2009 Fit


Capacities

Fuel tank Approx.

10.6 US gal (40 L)

Engine oil Changeꭧ1

Including

filter

3.8 US qt (3.6 L)

Without filter 3.6 US qt (3.4 L)

Total 4.4 US qt (4.2 L)

Engine

coolant

Automatic

transmission

Changeꭧ2 1.19 US gal (4.5 L)

Total 1.32 US gal (5.0 L)

Manual transmission

Changeꭧ2 1.16 US gal (4.4 L)

Total 1.29 US gal (4.9 L)

Automatic

transmission

fluid

Change 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)


Manual

transmisson fluid

Change 1.6 US qt (1.5 L)


Windshield

washer reservoir

U.S. Vehicles 2.6 US qt (2.5 L)

Canada Vehicles 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

ꭧ1: Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

ꭧ2: Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the engine

Reserve tank capacity:

0.116 US gal (0.44 L)

Air Conditioning

Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a)

Charge quantity 13.1－ 14.8 oz

(370－420 g)

Lubricant type SP-10

Lights

Headlights High/Low 12 V － 60/55W (HB2)

Front turn signal lights 12 V － 21W (Amber)

Parking lights/side marker

lights

12 V － 3.8W (Amber)

Fog lightsꭧ 12 V － 55W (H11)

Rear turn signal lights 12 V － 21W (Amber)

Stop/Taillights 12 V － 21/5W

Back-up lights 12 V － 16W

License plate lights 12 V － 5W

Ceiling light 12 V － 8W

Cargo area light 12 V － 5W

Map lightꭧ 12 V － 8W

High-mount brake light LED

ꭧ: For some types

Specifications

319


2009 Fit


Battery

Capacity 12 V－ 32 AH/5 HR

12 V－ 34 AH/5 HR

12 V－ 40 AH/20 HR

Fuses

Interior See page 309 or the fuse label

attached to the dashboard.

Under-hood See page 310 or the fuse box cover.

Alignment

Toe-in Front 0.0 in (0 mm)

Rear 0.10 in (2.5 mm)

Camber Front 0°

Rear －1°

Caster Front 3°20'

Tires

Size Front/Rear 175/65R15 84Sꭧ1

185/55R16 83Hꭧ2

Spare T125/70D15 95Mꭧ3

T135/80D15 99Mꭧ4

Pressure Front/Rear 32 psi (220 kPa,

2.2 kgf/cm2)ꭧ1

33 psi (230 kPa,

2.3 kgf/cm2)ꭧ2

Spare 60 psi (420 kPa,

4.2 kgf/cm2)

ꭧ1: All models except Sport

ꭧ2: Sport model

ꭧ3: On models without VSA system and all Canadian models with

manual transmission

ꭧ4: On models with VSA system

Specifications

320 2009 Fit


The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation (DOT)standards. The following explainsthese gradings.Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder andmaximum section width. Forexample:Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. Forexample, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course asa tire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires depends uponthe actual conditions of their use,however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

TractionThe traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire's ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces ofasphalt and concrete. A tire markedC may have poor tractionperformance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

321


2009 Fit


TemperatureThe temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire's resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

322 2009 Fit


The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

Tire SizeWhenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Below is an example oftire size with an explanation of whateach component means.

185/55R16 83H

185 －Tire width in millimeters.55 －Aspect ratio (the tire's

section height as apercentage of its width).

R －Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

16 －Rim diameter in inches.83 －Load index (a numerical code

associated with themaximum load the tire cancarry).

H －Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire Identification Number (TIN)The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and letters thatlook like the following example. TINis located on the sidewall of the tire.

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

DOT －This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

B97R －Manufacturer'sidentification mark.

FW6X －Tire type code.

TIRE LABELING EXAMPLE

(1)

(1) Tire Size(2) Tire Identification Number (TIN)(3) Maximum Tire Pressure(4) Maximum Tire Load

(4)

(3) (2)

(1)

2202 －YearWeek

Date of manufacture.

CONTINUED

Tire Labeling

323


2009 Fit


Maximum Tire PressureMax Press－ The maximum airpressure the tire can hold.Maximum Tire LoadMax Load － The maximum load thetire can carry at maximum airpressure.Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)－ Required FederalExplanationU.S. models onlyEach tire, including the spare (ifprovided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label.(If your vehicle has tires of a differentsize than the size indicated on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label, you should determinethe proper tire inflation pressure forthose tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale

when one or more of your tires issignificantly under-inflated.Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate them tothe proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle's handling andstopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under-inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Tire Labeling, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) － Required Federal Explanation

324 2009 Fit


Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is notoperating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is provided bya separate telltale, which displays thesymbol ‘‘ TPMS ’’ when illuminated.When the malfunction indicator isilluminated,

the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure asintended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons, including theinstallation of replacement oralternate tires or wheels on thevehicle that prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) － Required Federal Explanation

325


2009 Fit


The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle's engine produces severalbyproducts. Some of these arecarbon monoxide (CO), oxides ofnitrogen (NOx), and hydrocarbons(HC). Gasoline evaporating from thetank also produces hydrocarbons.Controlling the production of NOx,CO, and HC is important to theenvironment. Under certainconditions of sunlight and climate,NOx and HC react to formphotochemical ‘‘ smog. ’’ Carbonmonoxide does not contribute tosmog creation, but it is a poisonousgas.The Clean Air ActThe United States Clean Air Actꭧsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

ꭧ In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.Crankcase Emissions ControlSystemYour vehicle has a positive crankcaseventilation system. This keepsgasses that build up in the engine'scrankcase from going into theatmosphere. The positive crankcaseventilation valve routes them fromthe crankcase back to the intakemanifold. They are then drawn intothe engine and burned.

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystemAs gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.Onboard Refueling VaporRecoveryThe onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

Emissions Controls

326 2009 Fit


Exhaust Emissions ControlsThe exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine'scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

PGM-FI SystemThe PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection. It has threesubsystems: air intake, enginecontrol, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM) inautomatic transmission vehicles orthe engine control module (ECM) inmanual transmission vehicles usesvarious sensors to determine howmuch air is going into the engine. Itthen controls how much fuel to injectunder all operating conditions.Ignition Timing Control SystemThis system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)SystemThe exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaust gasand routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

Three Way Catalytic ConverterThe three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine's exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen(N2), and water vapor.Replacement PartsThe emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to worktogether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for moreinformation.

Emissions Controls

327


2009 Fit


The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear it. Park your vehicle away fromhigh grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine'sperformance. Follow theseguidelines to protect your vehicle'sthree way catalytic converter.● Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

● Keep the engine well maintained.● Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring,backfiring, stalling, or otherwisenot running properly.

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Three Way Catalytic Converter

328 2009 Fit


Testing of Readiness CodesIf you take your vehicle for anemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘ readinesscodes ’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.1. Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

2. Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

3. Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

4. Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

5. Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orneutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm, and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (about 3 minutes).

6. Without touching the acceleratorpedal, let the engine idle for 20seconds.

CONTINUED

Emissions Testing

329


2009 Fit


7. Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (automatic) or 5th (manual). Donot use the cruise control. Whentraffic allows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

8. Then drive in city/suburban trafficfor at least 10 minutes. Whentraffic conditions allow, let thevehicle coast for several secondswithout using the accelerator pedalor the brake pedal.

9. Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 30minutes.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Emissions Testing

330 2009 Fit


Customer Service Information .... 332Warranty Coverages ................... 333Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.

Vehicles)................................. 334Authorized Manuals.................... 335

Warranty and Customer Relations

331

Warranty

andCustom

erRelations

2009 Fit


Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it with thedealership's management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership'smanagement, contact HondaCustomer Service.U.S. Owners:American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Canadian Owners:Customer RelationsHonda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7546

When you call or write, please giveus this information:● Vehicle Identification Number (seepage 316)

● Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicle

● Date of purchase● Mileage on your vehicle● Your name, address, andtelephone number

● A detailed description of theproblem

● Name of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

Customer Service Information

332 2009 Fit


U.S. OwnersYour new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:New Vehicle Limited Warranty－covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty－ these twowarranties cover your vehicle'semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty－ this warranty gives up to100% credit toward a replacementbattery.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty－ a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered by a limited warranty. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.Rust Perforation Limited Warranty－all exterior body panels are coveredfor rust-through from the inside forthe specified time period with nomileage limit.Accessory Limited Warranty－Honda accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty booklet fordetails.Replacement Parts Limited Warranty－ covers all Honda replacementparts against defects in materials andworkmanship.

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty－ provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty－ providescoverage for as long as the purchaserof the muffler owns the vehicle.Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2009 Honda warranty informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle's originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.Canadian OwnersPlease refer to the 2009 warrantymanual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

333

Warranty

andCustom

erRelations

2009 Fit


If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer,or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153) ; go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 NewJersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC20590. You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

334 2009 Fit


Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm Incorporated.You can order by phone or online:

● Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only)

● Go online at www. helminc. com

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

PublicationForm Number

Form Description

61TK600 2009 Honda Fit Service Manual

61TK600EL 2009 Honda FitElectrical Troubleshooting Manual

61TK630 2009 Honda Fit Body Repair Manual

31TK6600 2009 Honda Fit Owner's Manual

31TK6800 2009 Honda Fit Navigation System Owner's Manual

31TK6M00 2009 Honda Fit Honda Service History

31TK6Q00 2009 Honda Fit Quick Start Guide

HON-R Order Form for Previous Years-Indicate Year and Model Desired

Service Manual:Covers maintenance and recommended procedures forrepair to engine and chassis components. It is writtenfor the journeyman mechanic, but it is simple enoughfor most mechanically inclined owners to understand.Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:Complements the Service Manual by providing in-depthtroubleshooting information for each electrical circuit inyour vehicle.Body Repair Manual:Describes the procedures involved in the replacementof damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

335

Warranty

andCustom

erRelations

2009 Fit


336 2009 Fit


A

AAABBB ~CCC ................................. 3

Accessories andModifications .......................... 206

ACCESSORY (Ignition KeyPosition) ................................... 80

Accessory Power Socket ............ 106Additives, Engine Oil ................. 254Adjusting the Steering Wheel ...... 77Advanced Airbags ........................ 27Airbag (SRS) ............................ 9, 22Air Conditioning System ............ 110Usage ...................................... 111

Air Pressure, Tires .............. 273, 274Alcohol in Gasoline .................... 198Antifreeze ................................... 256Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)Indicator Light .................. 62, 231Operation ................................ 231

Anti-theft, Audio System ............. 191Anti-theft Steering ColumnLock ......................................... 80

Audio System ............................. 115

Auto Control Mode, StartingEngine .................................... 216

Auto Door Locking ....................... 83Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .... 83Auto Door Unlocking ................... 85Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ... 20Automatic Speed Control ........... 194Automatic Transmission ............ 219Capacity, Fluid ........................ 319Checking Fluid Level .............. 259Paddle Shifters ........................ 224Shifting ................................... 219Shift Lever PositionIndicators ............................ 219

Shift Lever Positions ............... 220Shift Lock Release ................... 223

Automatic Transmission Fluid ... 259Auxiliary Input Jack ................... 190Average Fuel Mileage .................. 70

B

BatteryCharging SystemIndicator ........................ 60, 303

Jump Starting .......................... 299Maintenance ........................... 279Specifications .......................... 320

Before Driving ........................... 197Belts, Seat ................................ 8, 18Beverage Holders ...................... 106Booster Seats ............................... 50BrakesAnti-lock Brakes (ABS) ........... 231Break-in, New Linings ............. 198Bulb Replacement ................... 266Fluid ....................................... 261Parking ................................... 102System Design ........................ 230System Indicator ............... 60, 305Wear Indicators ....................... 230

Braking System .......................... 230Break-in, New Vehicle ................ 198Brightness Control,Instruments .............................. 76

CONTINUED

Index

I

INDEX

2009 Fit


Bulb ReplacementBack-up Lights ........................ 266Brake Lights ........................... 266Fog Lights ............................... 265Front Parking Lights ............... 263Front Side Marker Lights ........ 263Headlights .............................. 262Rear Bulbs .............................. 266Specifications .......................... 319Taillights ................................. 266Turn Signal Lights .......... 263, 266

Bulbs, Halogen .......................... 262

C

Cancel Button ............................ 196Capacities Chart ......................... 318Carbon Monoxide Hazard ............ 53Cargo ......................................... 208Cargo Hook ................................ 212Cargo, How to Carry .................. 208Carrying Cargo .......................... 208CAUTION, Explanation of ............ iiiCD Care ..................................... 186CD Error Messages ............ 128, 157

CD Player ........................... 122, 149Certification Label ...................... 316Chains, Tires .............................. 278Changing a Flat Tire .................. 285Changing OilHow to .................................... 254When to .................................. 245

Charging SystemIndicator ........................... 60, 303

Check Fuel Cap Indicator ............. 70Checklist, Before Driving ........... 215Childproof Door Locks ................. 82Child Safety .................................. 34Booster Seats ........................... 50Child Seats .......................... 39, 41Important Safety Reminders ..... 38Infants ...................................... 39Large Children ......................... 49LATCH ..................................... 43Risks with Airbags ................... 35Small Children ......................... 40Tethers .................................... 47Warning Labels ........................ 36Where Should a Child Sit? ........ 35

Child Seats ............................. 34, 41LATCH Anchorage Points ........ 43

Tether Anchorage Points ......... 47Cleaning the Seat Belts .............. 267Clock .......................................... 192Clutch Fluid ............................... 261Code, Audio System ................... 191CO in the Exhaust ................ 53, 326Cold Weather, Starting in ........... 216Compact Spare Tire .................... 284Consumer Information (U.S.only) ....................................... 332

Controls, Instruments and ............ 57CoolantAdding .................................... 256Checking ................................ 202Proper Solution ....................... 256Temperature Indicator ............. 63

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem ................................... 326

Cruise Control Indicator ............... 65Cruise Control Operation ........... 194Cup Holders ............................... 106Current Fuel Mileage ................... 70Customer Service Office ............ 332

Index

II 2009 Fit


D

DANGER, Explanation of ............. iiiDashboard ............................... 3, 58Daytime Running Lights (Canadaonly) ......................................... 75

Daytime Running Lights Indicator(Canada only) ........................... 65

Dead Battery .............................. 299Defects, Reporting Safety ........... 334Defogger, Rear Window ............... 76Defrosting the Windows ............ 113Detachable Anchor ...................... 99Dimensions ................................ 318Dimming the Headlights .............. 74DipstickAutomatic Transmission ......... 259Engine Oil ............................... 201

Directional Signals ....................... 63Disc Brake Wear Indicators ....... 230Disc Care ................................... 186Disc Player ErrorMessages ........................ 128, 157

Disposal of Used Oil ................... 255

DoorsChildproof Door Locks ............. 82Locking and Unlocking ............ 81Power Door Locks ................... 81

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S.Vehicles) ................................ 321

Downshifting, ManualTransmission .......................... 217

Driver and Passenger Safety .......... 5Driving ....................................... 213Economy ................................. 203

Driving Guidelines ..................... 214Driving with the Paddle Shifters(Sport only) ............................ 224

Dust and Pollen Filter ................ 268

E

Economy, Fuel ........................... 203Electric Power Steering (EPS)Indicator ................................... 62

Emergencies on the Road .......... 283Battery, Jump Starting ............. 299Brake System Indicator ........... 305Changing a Flat Tire ............... 285

Charging System Indicator ..... 303Checking the Fuses ................ 307Driving with a Flat Tire ........... 284Hazard Warning Flashers ........ 76Jump Starting .......................... 299Low Oil Pressure Indicator ..... 303Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 304Overheated Engine ................. 301Towing .................................... 311

Emergency Brake ...................... 102Emergency Flashers .................... 76Emergency Towing .................... 311Emissions Controls .................... 326Emissions Testing ...................... 329

CONTINUED

Index

III

INDEX

2009 Fit


EngineAdding Engine Coolant ........... 256Coolant TemperatureIndicator ............................... 63

If it Won’t Start ........................ 297Malfunction IndicatorLamp ............................. 60, 304

Oil Life Indicator ..................... 245Oil Pressure Indicator ....... 60, 303Oil, What Kind to Use ............. 253Overheating ............................ 301Specifications .......................... 318Speed Limiter .................. 218, 222Starting ................................... 216

Ethanol in Gasoline .................... 198Evaporative EmissionsControls .................................. 326

Exhaust Fumes ............................ 53Expectant Mothers, Use of SeatBelts by .................................... 16

F

Fan, Interior ............................... 111

Features, Comfort andConvenience ........................... 109

Filling the Fuel Tank .................. 199FiltersDust and Pollen ....................... 268Oil ........................................... 254

Flashers, Hazard Warning ........... 76Flat Tire, Changing a ................. 285Floor Mats ................................. 267FluidsAutomatic Transmission ......... 259Brake ...................................... 261Clutch ..................................... 261Manual Transmission .............. 260Windshield Washer ................. 258

FM/AM Radio Reception ........... 184Four-way Flashers ........................ 76Front Airbags ........................... 9, 25Front SeatAdjusting .................................. 93Airbags ................................. 9, 25

Fuel ............................................ 198Check Fuel Cap Indicator ......... 70Fill Door and Cap .................... 199Gauge ...................................... 70Low Fuel Indicator ................... 62

Octane Requirement ............... 198Oxygenated ............................. 198Reserve Indicator ..................... 62Tank, Filling the ...................... 199

Fuel Economy ............................ 203Fuses, Checking the .................. 307

G

Gas Mileage, Improving ............. 203Gasohol ...................................... 198Gasoline ..................................... 198Gauge ...................................... 68Low Fuel Indicator ................... 62Octane Requirement ............... 198Tank, Refueling ....................... 199

Gas Station Procedures .............. 199GaugesFuel .......................................... 70Speedometer ............................ 68

Gearshift Lever PositionsAutomatic Transmission ......... 220Manual Transmission .............. 217

Glove Box .................................. 105

Index

IV 2009 Fit


Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) ................................. 209

H

Halogen Headlight Bulbs ........... 262Hazard Warning Flashers ............ 76Headlights ............................. 74, 75Aiming .................................... 262Daytime Running Lights (Canadaonly) ..................................... 75

High Beam Indicator ................ 65High Beams, Turning on .......... 74Lights On Indicator .................. 64Low Beams, Turning on ........... 74Reminder Chime ...................... 75Replacing Halogen Bulbs ........ 262Turning on ............................... 74

Head Restraints ............................ 94Heated Mirror ............................ 102Heating and Cooling .................. 110High Beam Lever ......................... 75High-Low Beam Switch ................ 74Hood, Opening and Closingthe .......................................... 200

Horn ............................................ 72Hydraulic Clutch ........................ 261

I

Identification Number,Vehicle ................................... 316

IgnitionKeys ......................................... 78Switch ...................................... 80Timing Control System ........... 327

Immobilizer System ..................... 79Important Safety Precautions ......... 6Indicators, Instrument Panel ........ 59ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ....... 62, 231Brake (Parking and BrakeSystem) ......................... 60, 305

Charging System .............. 60, 303Check Fuel Cap ....................... 70Cruise Control .......................... 65Cruise Main ............................. 65Door and Tailgate Open ........... 62DRL (Daytime Running Lights)(Canada only) ....................... 65

Electric Power Steering ............ 62

Fog Lights ................................ 64High Beam ............................... 65High Temperature ................... 63Key (Immobilizer System) ....... 66Lights On ................................. 64Low Fuel .................................. 62Low Oil Pressure .............. 60, 303Low Temperature ..................... 63Low Tire Pressure (U.S.only) .............................. 64, 235

Maintenance Minder ......... 66, 245Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 304Passenger Airbag Off ............... 31Seat Belt Reminder ............. 18, 60Security System ....................... 66Side Airbag Off ......................... 61SRS ..................................... 30, 61TPMS (U.S. only) .............. 64, 236Turn Signal and HazardWarning ............................... 63

VSA System ............................. 67Washer Level ........................... 65

Infant Restraint ............................ 39Infant Seats .................................. 39Tether Anchorage Point ........... 47

CONTINUED

Index

V

INDEX

2009 Fit


Inflation, Proper Tire .................. 273Recommended Pressures ....... 274

Inside Mirror ............................. 101Inspection, Tire .......................... 275Installing a Child Seat .................. 42Instrument Panel .......................... 59Instrument Panel Brightness ....... 76Instruments and Controls ............. 57Interior Lights ............................ 107Introduction ................................... iiPod® Error Messages ......... 135, 176

J

Jacking up the Vehicle ............... 285Jack, Tire ................................... 285Jump Starting ............................. 299

K

Keys ............................................. 78

L

Label, Certification ..................... 316Lane Change, Signaling ............... 74Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 14, 19LATCH Anchorage System .......... 43LightsBulb Replacement ................... 262Indicator ................................... 59Interior .................................... 107Parking .................................... 74Turn Signal .............................. 74

Load Limit .................................. 209LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ...... 80LocksAnti-theft Steering Column ....... 80Childproof Door ....................... 82Fuel Fill Door .......................... 199Lockout Prevention .................. 82Power Door .............................. 81Tailgate .................................... 88

Low Coolant Level ...................... 202Lower Anchors ............................. 43Lower Glove Box ........................ 105Low Fuel Indicator ....................... 62

Low Oil PressureIndicator ........................... 60, 303

Lubricant Specifications Chart ... 319Luggage, Storing (cargo) ........... 208

M

Maintenance .............................. 243Main Items and Sub Items ...... 248Minder .................................... 245Minder Indicator ...................... 66Owner's MaintenanceChecks ................................ 250

Safety ...................................... 244Schedule ................................. 251

Malfunction Indicator Lamp ....... 304Manual Transmission ................. 217Checking Fluid Level .............. 260Shifting ................................... 217

Manual Transmission Fluid ....... 260Meters, Gauges ............................ 68Methanol in Gasoline ................. 198Mirrors, Adjusting ...................... 101Modifications ............................. 207Modifying Your Vehicle ............. 207

Index

VI 2009 Fit


N

Neutral Gear Position ................. 221New Vehicle Break-in ................. 198Normal Shift Speeds .................. 218NOTICE, Explanation of ................ iNumbers, Identification ............. 316

O

Odometer ..................................... 70Odometer, Trip ............................ 69OilChange, How to ...................... 254Change, When to .................... 245Checking Engine .................... 201Life, Engine ............................. 245Pressure Indicator ............. 60, 303Selecting Proper ViscosityChart ................................... 253

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery ................................ 326

ON (Ignition Key Position) .......... 80Outside Mirrors ......................... 101Overheating, Engine .................. 301

Owner's Maintenance Checks .... 250Oxygenated Fuels ...................... 198

P

Paddle Shifters ........................... 224Panel Brightness Control ............. 76Park Gear Position ..................... 220Parking ...................................... 229Parking Brake ............................ 102Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator ........................... 60, 305

Parking Lights ............................. 74Parking Over Things thatBurn ................................ 229, 328

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .... 31PGM-FI System .......................... 327Playing a Disc ..................... 122, 149Playing an iPod® .................. 129, 170Playing a PC card ....................... 158Playing a USB Flash MemoryDevice ............................. 136, 177

Playing the AM/FM Radio ......... 143Playing the FM/AM Radio ......... 115Pollen Filter ............................... 268

Power Door Locks ....................... 81Power Socket Locations ............. 106Power Windows ......................... 100Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts ........ 16Preparing to Drive ...................... 215Protecting Adults and Teens ........ 11Additional Safety Precautions ... 17Advice for Pregnant Women .... 16

Protecting Children ...................... 34General Guidelines .................. 34Protecting Infants ..................... 39Protecting Larger Children ...... 49Protecting Small Children ........ 40Using Child Seats withTethers ................................. 47

Using LATCH .......................... 43

R

Radiator Overheating ................. 301Radio/CD Sound System ........... 115Radio Theft Protection ............... 191Readiness Codes ........................ 329Rear Lights, BulbReplacement ........................... 266

CONTINUED

Index

VII

INDEX

2009 Fit


Rear View Mirror ....................... 101Rear Window Defogger ................ 76Rear Window Wiper andWasher ..................................... 73

Recommended Shift Speeds ....... 218Refueling .................................... 199Reminder Indicators ..................... 60Remote Audio Controls .............. 189Remote Transmitter ..................... 90Replacement InformationDust and Pollen Filter ............. 268Engine Oil and Filter ............... 254Fuses ...................................... 306Light Bulbs ............................. 262Schedule ................................. 251Tires ....................................... 276Wiper Blades .......................... 269

Replacing Seat Belts After aCrash ........................................ 20

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.Vehicles) ................................ 334

Reserve Tank, EngineCoolant ............................ 202, 256

Restraint, Child ............................ 34Reverse Gear Position ................ 221Reverse Lockout ........................ 223

Rotation, Tire ............................. 276

S

Safety Belts .............................. 8, 18Safety Defects, Reporting (U.S.only) ....................................... 334

Safety Features .............................. 7Airbags ...................................... 9Door Locks .............................. 11Head Restraints ........................ 13Seat Belts .............................. 8, 14Seats & Seat-Backs .............. 11, 12

Safety Labels, Location of ............. 54Safety Messages .......................... iiiSeat Belts ................................. 8, 18Additional Information ............. 18Advice for Pregnant Women .... 16Automatic Seat BeltTensioners ........................... 20

Cleaning .................................. 267Detachable Anchor .................. 99Lap/Shoulder Belt .............. 14, 19Maintenance ............................ 20

Reminder Indicator andBeeper ............................. 18, 60

System Components ................ 18Use During Pregnancy ............. 16Wearing a Lap/ShoulderBelt .................................. 14, 19

Seats ............................................ 93Seats, Adjusting the ..................... 93Seat Under Box .......................... 106Security System ......................... 193SensorsDriver's Seat Position Sensor ... 27Front Passenger's WeightSensors ................................ 27

Impact Sensors ................... 22, 23Serial Number ............................ 316Service Intervals ......................... 245Service Manual (U.S. only) ........ 335Service Station Procedures ........ 199Setting the Clock ........................ 192Shifting the AutomaticTransmission .......................... 219

Shift Lever Position Indicators ... 219Shift Lock Release ...................... 223

Index

VIII 2009 Fit


Side Airbags ................................. 28How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works ................... 31

How Your Side Airbags Work .. 28Off Indicator ............................. 31

Side Curtain Airbags .................... 30How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork .................................... 30

Side Marker Lights, BulbReplacement in ....................... 263

Signaling Turns ............................ 63Snow Tires ................................. 278Sound System ............................ 115Spare Tire .................................. 284Inflating ........................... 273, 284

Spark Plugs ................................ 318Specifications ............................. 318Speed Control ............................ 194Speed Limiter ...................... 218, 222Speedometer ................................ 68SRS, Additional Information ......... 22Additional Safety Precautions ... 33Airbag Service .......................... 32Airbag System Components ..... 22How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works ................... 31

How the SRS Indicator Works .. 30How Your Front AirbagsWorks .................................. 25

How Your Side Airbags Work .. 28How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork .................................... 30

SRS Indicator ......................... 30, 61START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 80Starting the Engine .................... 216In Cold Weather at HighAltitude ................................ 216

With a Dead Battery ................ 299State Emissions Testing ............. 329Steam Coming from Engine ....... 301Steering WheelAdjustment ............................... 77Anti-theft Column Lock ............ 80Buttons ................................... 189

Steering Wheel Buttons ............. 194Stereo Sound System ................. 115Storing Your Vehicle .................. 281Sun Visor ................................... 106Supplemental Restraint

System .............................. 9, 22Servicing .................................. 32SRS Indicator ...................... 30, 61

System Components ................ 22Synthetic Oil .............................. 254

T

Tachometer .................................. 68Tailgate ........................................ 88Open Indicator ......................... 62Opening the ............................. 88

Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ..... 266Taking Care of theUnexpected ............................ 283

Technical DescriptionsDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S.Vehicles) ............................. 321

Emissions Control Systems ..... 326Three Way CatalyticConverter ............................ 328

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)－ Required Federal

Explanation ...................... 324Temperature Indicator ................. 63Temporarily Repairing a FlatTire ........................................ 291

Tensioners, Seat Belts .................. 20CONTINUED

Index

IX

INDEX

2009 Fit


Tether Anchorage Points ............. 47Theft Protection, Radio .............. 191Three Way CatalyticConverter ............................... 328

Tilt the Steering Wheel ................ 77Time, Setting the ........................ 192Tire Chains ................................ 278Tire, How to Change a Flat ........ 285Tire Information ......................... 323Tire Labeling .............................. 323Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) ........................... 235, 324

Tires .......................................... 273Air Pressure ............................ 274Chains ..................................... 278Checking Wear ....................... 275Compact Spare ........................ 284DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S.Vehicles) ............................. 321

Inflation ................................... 273Inspection ............................... 275Labeling .................................. 323Low Tire Pressure Indicator(U.S. only) ..................... 64, 235

Maintenance ........................... 276

Pressure Monitoring System(U.S. only) ........................... 235

Replacing ................................ 276Rotating .................................. 276Snow ....................................... 278Specifications .......................... 320

Tools, Tire Changing ................. 285TowingA Trailer .................................. 238Emergency Wrecker ............... 311

TPMS (Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem) (U.S. only) ............ 235

Indicator (U.S.only) ........... 64, 236Required FederalExplanation ......................... 324

TransmissionChecking Fluid Level,Automatic ............................ 259

Checking Fluid Level,Manual ................................ 260

Fluid Selection ................ 259, 260Identification Number ............. 316Shifting the Automatic ............. 219Shifting the Manual ................. 217

Treadwear .................................. 321Trip Meter ................................... 69

Turn Signals ................................. 63

U

Unexpected, Taking Care ofthe .......................................... 283

Uniform Tire Quality Grading(U.S. only) .............................. 321

Unleaded Gasoline ..................... 198Upper Glove Box ........................ 105USB Flash Memory Device ErrorMessages ........................ 142, 183

Used Oil, How to Dispose of ...... 255

V

Vehicle Capacity Load ................ 209Vehicle Dimensions ................... 318Vehicle Identification Number ... 316Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA®),

aka Electronic StabilityControl (ESC), System .... 233

VSA System Indicator .............. 67Vehicle Storage .......................... 281

Index

X 2009 Fit


Ventilation .................................. 112VIN ............................................ 316Viscosity, Oil .............................. 253

W

WARNING, Explanation of ........... iiiWarning Labels, Location of ......... 54Warranty Coverages (U.S.only) ....................................... 333

Washer, WindshieldChecking the Fluid Level ........ 258Fluid Level Indicator (Canadaonly) ..................................... 65

Operation ................................. 73WheelsAdjusting the Steering .............. 77Alignment and Balance ........... 276Compact Spare ........................ 284Wrench, Nut ........................... 285

WindowsAuto Down .............................. 101Auto Reverse ........................... 101Operating the Power ............... 100Rear, Defogger ......................... 76

WindshieldCleaning ................................... 73Defroster ................................. 113Washers ............................ 73, 258

Wipers, WindshieldChanging Blades ..................... 269Operation ................................. 73

Worn Tires ................................. 275Wrecker, Emergency Towing .... 311

Index

XI

INDEX

2009 Fit


Gasoline:Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 87 or higher.

Fuel Tank Capacity:10.6 US gal (40 L)

Recommended Engine Oil:API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page 253).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):3.8 US qt (3.6 L)

Automatic Transmission Fluid:Honda Genuine ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid)(see page 259).

Manual Transmission Fluid:Honda Manual Transmission Fluidpreferred, or an SAE 10W-30 or10W-40 motor oil as a temporaryreplacement (see page 260).

Capacity (including differential):1.6 US qt (1.5 L)

Brake Fluid:Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page 261).

Tire Pressure (measured cold):Front/Rear:

All models except Sport32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm2)

Sport model33 psi (230 kPa, 2.3 kgf/cm2)

Spare Tire Pressure:60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)

Service Information Summary

2009 Fit


OWNER _________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

ADDRESS _______________________________________________________STREET

_________________________________ _________________________________ ___________________CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE

V. I. N. ___________________________________________________________

DELIVERY DATE __________________________________________________(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

DEALER NAME ___________________ DEALER NO. ___________________ADDRESS _______________________________________________________

STREET

_________________________________ _________________________________ ___________________CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/

POSTAL CODE

OWNER'S SIGNATURE ___________________________________________DEALER'S SIGNATURE ___________________________________________

This owner's manual should be considered apermanent part of the vehicle and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This owner's manual covers all models of theFit. You may find descriptions of equipmentand features that are not on your particularvehicle.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the time ofapproval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.reserves the right, however, to discontinue orchange specifications or design at any timewithout notice and without incurring anyobligation whatsoever.

POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN AVISIMPORTANT: Si vous avez besoin d'unManuel du Conducteur en français,veuillez demander à votreconcessionnaire de commander lenuméro de pièce 33TK6C00

Owner's Identification

2009 Fit


Documents

2009 Honda Fit Owner's Manual